JP7051485B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a first mechanism body (for example, a game board or a front door) and a second mechanism body (for example, a game frame or a housing) to which the first mechanism body can be attached and detached are provided, and the first mechanism body There are pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like provided with control means (for example, effect control means) capable of controlling the first mechanism and the second mechanism.

As a gaming machine of this type, for example, a control means provided on a gaming board (first mechanism) detects an abnormal state of a movable body operably provided on a gaming frame (second mechanism). Based on this, there are some that can perform a predetermined abnormality notification (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-67424

In the game machine of Patent Document 1, when a game board that does not correspond to a game frame having a movable body (for example, a game board corresponding to a specific game frame of a different type) is attached, the control means causes an abnormality in the movable body. There is a problem that a problem such as ignition of the motor or the like may occur because the drive signal is output to the motor or the like without being recognized.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the occurrence of a defect due to being attached to a specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means A is a gaming machine including a first mechanism body and a specific second mechanism body to which the first mechanism body can be attached and detached.
The first mechanism can be attached to and detached from a second mechanism including the specific second mechanism and a special second mechanism outside the gaming machine, and the first mechanism and the second mechanism can be controlled. Has various control means ,
The second mechanism is
Movable movable body and
The driving means for driving the movable body and
A plurality of detection means including a first detection means for detecting the state of the movable body and a second detection means for detecting the operation of the player.
Equipped with
The detection specific information that can specify the detection state of each detection means can be output to the control means.
The control means is
It is possible to control to drive the movable body by the driving means.
It is possible to execute an initial operation control for causing the movable body to perform an initial operation of returning the movable body to the origin position, which is an operation of changing the detection state of the first detecting means.
Based on the detection specific information output from the second mechanism by the execution of the initial operation control, it is determined whether or not the first mechanism is attached to the specific second mechanism, and the determination is made. Based on the results of the above, it is possible to produce an aspect according to the state of each of the plurality of types of second mechanisms.
Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention is
A first mechanism body (for example, a game board 2 / variable display unit) and a second mechanism body (for example, a game frame / main body portion including an opening / closing frame 50 and a game machine frame 3) to which the first mechanism body can be attached and detached. (For example, pachinko gaming machines 1A, 1B / slot machines)
The first mechanism has a control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the first mechanism and the second mechanism, and has a plurality of types of second mechanisms including the specific second mechanism (for example, the effect control CPU 120). For example, it can be attached to and detached from the dedicated frame and the common frame).
The second mechanism can detect a plurality of detection means for detecting the state of the second mechanism (for example, the game frame can detect the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. Stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, etc. ), And the detection specific information that can specify the detection state of each detection means can be output to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame can output the detection signal input state to the input port 131. It is possible to generate identifiable serial data and output it to the effect control board 12),.
Based on the detection specific information output from the second mechanism, the control means determines whether or not the first mechanism is attached to the specific second mechanism, and the determination result is determined. It is possible to perform the effect based on (for example, the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 by the effect control CPU 120 in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, S87 of the third initialization process of S51B. The type of the game frame is determined based on the above, and the effect as shown in FIG. 18 is performed based on the determination result.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to being attached to the specific second mechanism body.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The control means determines whether or not it is the specific second mechanism based on a specific signal output from the second mechanism (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the third initialization process of S51B. In S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87, serial data of a specific port number (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) is specified. A part for determining whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether or not the specified serial data contains data indicating the input state of the detection signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be suitably determined whether or not it is a specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The control means determines whether or not the control means is the specific second mechanism based on the input time of the specific signal output from the second mechanism (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the third of S51B. In the initialization process, a portion for determining whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the input time of a specific signal output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be suitably determined whether or not it is a specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3.
The control means determines whether or not the control means is the specific second mechanism based on a plurality of specific signals output from the second mechanism (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the third initial stage of the S51B. Serial data of a plurality of specific port numbers (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, S87 of the conversion process. Is specified, and whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined depending on whether or not the specified serial data has data indicating the input state of the detection signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be suitably determined whether or not it is a specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4.
The second mechanism (for example, a gaming frame including an opening / closing frame 50 and a gaming machine frame 3) is
Including operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.)
The detection specific information that can specify the detection state of the detection means for detecting the operation of the operation means can be output to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 has a stick controller 31A or a push button to the input port 131. A part capable of generating serial data capable of specifying the input state of the detection signal from 31B and outputting it to the effect control board 12.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an operation abnormality.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5.
The second mechanism (for example, a gaming frame including an opening / closing frame 50 and a gaming machine frame 3) is
Including movable bodies (for example, rocket 45 with a dedicated frame, cover body 48, stick controller 31A, etc.)
Drive specific information that can specify the drive state of the movable body can be output to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 has a vibration motor 35C, a rocket motor 37C, a cover motor 39C, and a stick motor to the input port 131. A part capable of generating serial data that can specify the input state of the drive signal from the 35D and outputting it to the effect control board 12.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an operation abnormality.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6.
Based on the result of the determination, the control means produces an effect according to the state of each of the plurality of types of second mechanisms (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is dedicated to the third initialization process of S51B). When the frame flag is set, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the dedicated frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18A to 18C), and the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B. If it is set, the effect of displaying the image corresponding to the common frame at each effect timing is performed (see FIGS. 18 (D) to (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7.
The plurality of types of second mechanisms include a second mechanism (eg, a common frame) having an operable movable body (eg, a stick controller 31A of a common frame).
Based on the result of the determination, the control means performs an effect of operating the movable body in a different operation mode according to the type of the second mechanism (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is a common frame, the stick. In the operation promotion effect of the controller 31A, an effect of raising the stick controller 31A to the ascending position can be executed. See FIG. 18 (D).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 8.
The control means can determine whether or not it is the specific second mechanism when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and can perform a type of effect control process according to the result of the determination. (For example, based on the result that the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of the game frame in the third initialization process of S51B, the effect according to the type of the game frame in the effect symbol changing process or the jackpot game process. (For example, the part that executes (see FIG. 18).)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the second mechanism.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 9.
The control means may determine whether or not it is the specific second mechanism when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and perform the effect at a predetermined effect timing in an manner corresponding to the determination result. It is possible (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 sets the dedicated frame flag in the third initialization process of S51B, an effect corresponding to the dedicated frame is displayed at each effect timing (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). (See A) to (C)), when the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the common frame is performed at each effect timing (FIGS. 18 (D) to 18 (D) to C). (Refer to F)) Part.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the second mechanism.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine 1A as an Example of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for the gaming machine of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of FIG. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine 1B as an Example of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board of the pachinko gaming machine 1B of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for the gaming machine of the pachinko gaming machine 1B of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which compares the type of the operation means and the movable body mounted on a special frame and a common frame. It is a block diagram which shows the wiring connection state between the detection means on the game frame side, and an effect control board. (A) is a dedicated frame, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship with various electronic components connected to each input port of the serial conversion IC of the common frame. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 2nd initialization process executed by the effect control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 2nd initialization process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 3rd initialization process executed by the effect control CPU. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of notification performed by the effect control CPU in the third initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode as a modification 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 3rd initialization process as the modification 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the effect control main process as the modification 3 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the main part of the game frame and the game board as the modification 4 of this invention. (A) is a front view showing a window unit, and (B) is a rear view showing a window unit. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the front, and (B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the window part diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the structure of a window unit is seen from diagonally behind. It is a vertical sectional view which shows the tubular part. It is a vertical sectional view which shows the internal structure of the opening / closing frame and the frame for a game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby mode from the diagonally front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation form diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form diagonally from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of 1st operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of 1st operation form from the side view. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the side view. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation of each movable body and the effect LED in the movable body effect. (A) is a schematic view of the light emitting mode of the effect LED and the movable body LED from the side, and (B) is a schematic view of the light emitting mode of the effect LED and the movable body LED seen from above. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a standby state showing a normal time of the effect display device, (B) is a schematic view showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and (C) shows a second operation state of the effect display device. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which opened the opening / closing frame in the 2nd operation mode of a movable body unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the main effect control command which is transmitted and set in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the processing contents executed in the command analysis processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the process in S57. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a movable body effect setting process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a movable body effect in the case of Super Reach A. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. (A) to (F) are explanatory views showing an example of the flow of the composite effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the two-step operation of the 1st movable body of the modification 5. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a determination example of the movable body effect in the case of the modified example 5, the alternative example 1, and the alternative example 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of execution timing of various notices, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a determination example of a movable body effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the movable body production at the time of the reach development notice and at the time of the fanning production. It is explanatory drawing which shows that it operates in the arc-shaped path of the 1st movable body of the modification 6A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the swinging motion of the 1st movable body of the modification 6B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the multi-position stop of the 1st movable body of the modification 6C. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 6D, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a guide hole of a partition plate and the like. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the window part unit of the modification 7. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the window part unit of the modification 8. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the fixed ball passage of the modified example 9, and (B) (C) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the mobile ball passage of the modified example 9. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 10, (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit, (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit as another example, (D). ) Is a side view of (C). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd transmission body of the modification 11 and the frame for a game machine. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 12, and (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 13. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the tubular body of the modified example 14, and (B) is a diagram showing an example in which the light emitting mode of the tubular body of the modified example 14 is stepwise different. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the tubular body of the modified example 15, and (B) is a diagram showing an example in which the light emitting mode of the tubular body of the modified example 15 is stepwise different. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 16, and (B) is a front view showing an effect mode of the light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body of the modification 17. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable body effect execution processing of the modification 18. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body of the modification 18. (A) and (B) are vertical sectional views showing the window unit of the modified example 19. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the window unit of the modified example 20 is located at the first viewing position, and (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the window unit is moved to the second viewing position. A flowchart showing an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modification 20, (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of the frame operation effect in the case of super reach B, and (C) is a determination of the movable body effect in the case of super reach B. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine of the modification 21 from the front. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an operation example of the frame-side movable body of the modified example 21. A flowchart showing an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modification 21, (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of the frame side movable body effect in the case of super reach B, and (C) is a case of the second operation pattern PTB-2. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the frame side movable body production of. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the deformation operation of the first movable body of the modified example 22, and (B) is a front view showing the magnitude relationship between the holes of the first movable body and the second transmissive body shown in (A). Is. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deformation operation of the 1st movable body of the modification 23.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on a main board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the frame for the gaming machine is opened. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1A (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board) having a gaming board surface on the front side and a gaming machine frame for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. It is composed of 3 (underframe). The game board 2 is removable from the game machine frame 3, and the game board 2 has a game area (also referred to as a “game unit”) 10 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by a guide rail 2b. It is formed. The game area 10 is a region in which a game ball as a game medium is launched from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and hit, and the hit game ball can flow down.

Further, the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with an opening / closing frame 50 provided with a window portion 51 for visually recognizing the gaming area 10 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the opening / closing frame 50 provides the gaming area 10 with the opening / closing frame 50. It can be opened and closed, and when the opening / closing frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the window portion 51. Further, the opening / closing frame 50 is formed in a size capable of covering the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, and is formed below the window portion 51 by a player or the like in order to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area. A ball striking operation handle 30 (operation knob) to be operated is provided.

A rocket 45 as a movable body that can move in the front-rear direction between the origin position and the protruding position protruding forward from the origin position is provided on the front surface of the ball striking operation handle 30. It can be driven back and forth by a rocket motor 37C provided inside. Further, inside the ball striking operation handle 30, it is detected that the rocket 45 is at the origin position, and the rocket origin position sensor 37A that outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 and the rocket 45 are detected at the protruding position. A rocket protrusion position sensor 37B that outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided.

The game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material (transmissive member) such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. ), A board surface plate (not shown) provided with a guide rail 2b (see FIG. 3), and a spacer member (not shown) integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. .. The game board 2 of the present embodiment is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, but is not limited to this, and is formed into a substantially square shape in front view by a non-translucent member such as a veneer plate. It may be configured.

A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, a lower right position of the game area 10). These are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are special symbols (special identification information) that are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them in a special symbol game that is an example of a variable display game. A "special figure") is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). The variable display (variable display) of a special symbol is to change (display in a variable manner) a plurality of types of special symbols by an update display or the like (the same applies to other variable displays). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as a display result (variable display result). In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .. The special figure game of the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game of the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

The effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are provided near the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2. The effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and form a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5A, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game are supported. (For example, in synchronization with the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game), for example, "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, which are multiple variable display units such as three. In 5R, the effect symbol (decorative symbol), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, is variablely displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display). The variable display of this effect symbol is also included in the variable display game.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5A, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a variation display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a definite effect symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variation display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the display area of the effect display device 5A includes movable bodies (first movable body 300, second movable body 400, third movable body 500L, 500R, and fourth movable body 600L, which will be described later. 600R) is provided with a specific game information display area 5Z for displaying specific game information related to the game (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) regardless of the position. ing. The small symbols are the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol game and smaller than the effect symbol, and the second small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol game and smaller than the effect symbol. included. The small symbol may be one that is always displayed or one that is displayed only for a predetermined period. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the state is currently in the variable display (variable display). The right-handed display is a display that urges the player to operate the hitting ball operation handle so that the game ball is launched on the right side of 10 in the game area. In this embodiment, a part of the display area of the effect display device 5A is set as the specific game information display area 5Z, but at least one of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is provided with the specific game information display area 5Z. You may. Further, the game board 2 may be provided with a specific game information display device (for example, LED, lamp, 7-segment LED, liquid crystal display device, etc.).

The width of the display screen of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is substantially half that of the effect display device 5A, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A so as to be movable and rotatable as described later. In the present embodiment, the central effect display device 5A mainly performs variable display of the effect symbol and various effects, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y perform the effects related to the effect display device 5A. However, the effect display device 5A may be replaced with a variable display of the effect symbol, or an effect separate from the effect display device 5A may be performed.

Further, these effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2c formed in the game board 2. In the present embodiment, a part of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be visually recognized through the board plate 200. Further, a frame-shaped center decorative frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

A first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are set at two places on the left and right below the display area of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. That is, in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, the hold display image corresponding to the special figure game whose execution is held is displayed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1A is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. It will be done.

At the right side position of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, there are a first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages. It is provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. For example, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are each configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and the first special figure hold storage number (the hold storage number of the first special figure game) depends on the number of lighting of the LEDs. ) And the number of second special figure hold storage (the number of hold memory of the second special figure game) are displayed.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the effect display device 5A, and a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided below the effect display device 5Y. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state in which it protrudes into the game area 10 and in an open state in which it is retracted from the game area 10 by the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. It is provided with a normal electric accessory having a variable movable plate, and forms a second start winning opening as a start area (second start area).

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special drawing. If the number of reserved storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first start condition is satisfied. Further, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second If the number of reserved special figures is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second start condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at a right position of the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door that is opened and closed by the solenoid 82 shown in FIG. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area is an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a player who cannot pass (enter) (or is difficult to enter) the game ball. It changes to a closed state that is disadvantageous to.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the large winning opening are detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the large winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a position on the right side of the second hold display 25B. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs or the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols (ordinary figures, ordinary figures) which are a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. The variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game (normal figure game). The normal game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the gate switch 21 in FIG. 2 is turned on, whereby the passing of the game ball is detected. At a position on the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41. That is, the normal figure hold display 25C displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LED lights.

On the surface of the game board 2, a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, the game board 2 is arranged with light emitting parts on the game area side. Examples of the light emitting component on the game area side include a light emitting component (LED) not shown in the center decorative frame 52, and a light emitting component (LED) not shown in the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. )and so on. Further, the game board 2 may be provided with a light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of its surface (for example, a light guide region). At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and an effect LED 9 for the gaming effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the gaming area.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is supplied to a hitting ball launching device (not shown). An upper plate 90 (also referred to as a hitting ball supply plate) for holding (storing) the ball is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a discharge port (not shown) is provided to discharge a small amount of surplus balls, foul balls, etc. from the upper plate 90 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. A push button 31B is provided on the member forming the upper plate. Inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B, a button sensor 36A that detects the player's operation (for example, pressing) on the push button 31B and outputs the operation detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided. There is. Further, a cross-shaped button 46 is provided on the member forming the upper plate 90. Inside the main body of the upper plate 90 at the installation position of the cross-shaped button 46, the player's operation (for example, pressing up, down, left, right) on the cross-shaped button 46 is detected, and the operation detection signal is produced on the control board 12. Cross-shaped button sensors 38A to 38D for outputting to are provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 3. Inside the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3 in the lower part of the stick controller 31A, there are a stick origin position sensor 35A that detects that the operation rod is at the origin position and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12, and an operation rod. A stick pull position sensor 35B that detects that the position is in the pull position and outputs an operation detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided. Further, inside the stick controller 31A, a vibration motor 35C capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A is provided.

In the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a movable body that can rotate between an origin position that hides the celestial light emitting unit 47 invisible to the player and an open position that opens the effect unit so that the player can see it. The cover body 48 is provided as a cover body 48, and can be opened and closed by a cover body motor 39C provided inside. Further, inside the frame 3 for the game machine, the cover body origin position sensor 39A that detects that the cover body 48 is at the origin position and outputs the detection signal to the effect control board 12 and the cover body 48 are in the open position. A cover body open position sensor 39B that detects the presence and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided.

Further, on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a light emitting portion composed of a plurality of effect LEDs 9 is extended in a band shape downward from the left and right sides of the heavenly light emitting portion 47 along the left and right sides of the window portion 51. ing.

Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, various types of transmissions are transmitted between the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, the LED control board 14, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying a control signal, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. Further, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the main board 11, detection signals from a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, and a count switch 23 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the pass gate 41 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring to be transmitted is connected. In addition, display control of the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like is performed. The wiring that transmits the command signal for is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time of the effect symbol, a type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work area. RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102), a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and a random number circuit that updates numerical data indicating random number values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include 104 and an I / O 105 (Input / Output port 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1A is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, various data (data such as fluctuation patterns and various determination tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program. The I / O 105 includes an input port into which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the player has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit. The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 to display the effect. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the production LED 9 are mounted.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. A display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. , I / O 125 and so on. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 realizes the function of the effect control board 12 (execution of the effect) by executing the program stored in the ROM 121. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern, data such as various determination tables, etc.) are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

Further, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 includes not only the operation control data for operating the movable body provided on the game board 2, but also the opening / closing frame 50 and the game machine frame 3 constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Motion control data for operating a movable body provided in the game frame, image data for displaying an image corresponding to the operation means provided in the game frame, and the like are stored.

The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), or the like.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used when controlling the effect operation. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program. The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The voice control board 13 has a function of outputting voice (voice specified by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12. The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the effect LED 9 (turning on / off according to the driving content indicated by the illumination signal) based on the illumination signal from the effect control board 12.

The effect display device 5A includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit for driving the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5A via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. Further, although the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are different in size from the effect display device 5A and movable as described later, the display configuration is the same as that of the effect display device 5A.

In the effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5A and the effect symbol display area of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, the effect symbol changes in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. The display starts. When the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first and second special symbol games, the finalized effect symbol (three effect symbols) becomes the display result (variable display result) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Combination) is displayed as a stop (derivative display).

Further, the effect control board 12 has a setting changeover switch 55 for setting effects such as volume and light amount, a first drive mechanism 310, a second drive mechanism 320, a third drive mechanism 330, and a third drive mechanism 330 of the first movable body 300. 4 Drive mechanism 340, 5th drive mechanism 410 of 2nd movable body 400, 6th drive mechanism 510L, 510R of 3rd movable body 500L, 500R, 7th drive mechanism 610L, 610R of 4th movable body 600L, 600R Board-side electronic components provided on the board 2 side, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cross button Frame-side electronic components provided on the game frame side, such as sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, and cover body motor 39C, are connected.

Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine frame 3 is supported by an outer frame 60 formed in a vertically long square frame shape by an upper plate 61, a lower plate 62, a left side plate 63, and a right side plate 64. Specifically, the lower part of the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the curtain plate 65, and the upper left corner portion and the lower left corner portion of the outer frame 60 are provided in the upper left corner portion and the lower left corner portion of the gaming machine frame 3 in the vertical direction. A bearing portion (not shown) that rotatably supports a rotating shaft (not shown) facing the machine is provided, and the gaming machine frame 3 is the outer frame 60 centered on the vicinity of the left side of the outer frame 60. It is rotatably supported between a closed position that closes the opening and an open position that opens the opening.

The gaming machine frame 3 is formed with a mounting portion 160 having an opening large enough to insert a back cover 70 for covering various parts and devices provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. A locking recess (not shown) is provided at the upper and lower positions on the left side, and a board holding metal fitting (not shown) is provided at the upper and lower positions on the right side. Therefore, the back cover 70 on the back surface of the gaming board 2 is inserted into the mounting portion 160 from the front of the gaming machine frame 3, and the right end portion is inserted into the locking recess (not shown) with the left end portion of the gaming board 2 inserted. The gaming board 2 can be mounted on the gaming machine frame 3 by locking with the board holding metal fittings (not shown). Further, the gaming board 2 can be easily removed from the gaming machine frame 3 by releasing the locked state of the board holding metal fittings.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, various electronic components such as sensors and motors provided in the game frame including the game machine frame 3 and the opening / closing frame 50 are below the mounting portion 160 of the game machine frame 3. A frame-side connector WCN to which wiring from parts is connected is provided, and a board-side connector BCN to which wiring from various electronic parts such as sensors and motors provided on the game board 2 is connected is provided at the lower part of the game board 2. Is provided, and the frame-side connector WCN and the board-side connector BCN are connected by mounting the game board 2 on the mounting portion 160 from the front. As a result, among the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12 by mounting the game board 2 on the mounting unit 160, the electronic components on the board side are connected to the effect control board 12, and the game board 2 is mounted from the mounting unit 160. By removing the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12, the connection between the electronic components on the board side and the effect control board 12 is released.

Next, FIGS. 4 to 7 show another pachinko gaming machine 1B. The pachinko gaming machine 1A is manufactured as a dedicated frame in which a gaming frame composed of an opening / closing frame 50 and a gaming machine frame 3 has a design and an accessory unique to a specific model and is used only for the specific model. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the gaming frame composed of the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 has a predetermined design, accessories, and the like, and is commonly used by a plurality of models. It was manufactured as a frame.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1B has almost the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1A in terms of the basic structure and circuit configuration of the gaming machine, and thus is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Detailed explanations will be omitted by assigning the same reference numerals to functional parts, electronic parts, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B are a gaming machine frame 3 rotatably supported by an outer frame 60 and having an opening / closing frame 50, and a gaming machine frame 3 respectively. The main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are mounted on the back side of the game board 2, but the front design of the opening / closing frame 50 is different. ..

In the game board 2 of each pachinko gaming machine 1A and 1B, a game area 10 provided with a unique accessory (for example, various winning openings) is formed, and a movable body and decoration for directing unique to the model are formed. While the members and the like are provided, the outer shape of the board is formed in almost the same manner. Therefore, the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B are provided. It can be mounted on any of the mounting portions 160 of the above. Further, the above-mentioned frame-side connector WCN and board-side connector BCN are also provided in the same manner in the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming frames of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player, such as a ball striking operation handle 30, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and a cross button 46. .. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided with a cover body 48 capable of opening and closing the celestial light emitting unit 47. The ball striking operation handle 30, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the cross button 46, and the like are operation means having similar functions and used for the same purpose, but as shown in FIG. 7, they have appearance designs and functions, respectively. Etc. are different.

Specifically, the ball striking operation handle 30 can be rotated by a launching device to launch a game ball into the game area 10. The ball striking operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided with a rocket 45 which is a movable body that can move between the origin position and the protruding position. Not provided.

The stick controller 31A can move between the origin position (non-operation position) and the pull position (operation position) on the front side of the origin position, and is detected by the stick origin position sensor 35A at the origin position and the pull position. It is detected by the stick pull position sensor 35B and vibrates by the vibration motor 35C. On the other hand, the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A does not move up and down, but the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1B moves up and down by the stick motor 35D. Further, the design of the stick controller 31A is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

The push button 31B can be moved between the origin position (non-operation position) and the operation position (operation position) below the origin position, and is detected by the button sensor 36A at the operation position. There is. Further, the design of the push button 31B is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

The cross button 46 can be pressed downward at the origin position (non-operation position) and any part on the front side, the rear side, the left side, or the right side of the origin position, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D at each operation position. Is to be detected by. The design of the cross-shaped button 46 is the same for the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

The cover body 48 is rotatable between the origin position and the open position, is detected by the cover body origin position sensor 39A at the origin position, is detected by the cover body open position sensor 39B at the open position, and is detected by the cover body motor 39C. Allows the cover body 48 to rotate. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1B is not provided with a celestial light emitting unit 47 and a cover body 48 capable of opening and closing the celestial light emitting unit 47.

Further, the dedicated frame (pachinko gaming machine 1A) does not have a stick motor for moving the stick controller 31A up and down, but the common frame (pachinko gaming machine 1B) has a stick motor 35D for moving the stick controller 31A up and down. .. Further, the dedicated frame (pachinko gaming machine 1A) has a rocket motor 37C for operating the rocket 45 and a cover body motor 39C for operating the cover body 48 as a movable body for directing, but they are common. The frame does not have a rocket motor or a cover motor.

As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B has a setting changeover switch 55 for setting effects such as volume and light intensity, a first drive mechanism 701 of the movable body 700, and a second drive. Board-side electronic components such as the mechanism 702 provided on the game board 2 side, and game frame sides such as stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C, stick motor 35D, button sensor 36A, and cross button sensors 38A to 38D. Is connected to the frame-side electronic component provided in.

Further, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 includes not only the operation control data for operating the movable body provided on the game board 2, but also the opening / closing frame 50 and the game machine frame 3 constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Motion control data for operating a movable body provided in the game frame, image data for displaying an image corresponding to the operation means provided in the game frame, and the like are stored.

In this embodiment, for example, the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is attached to the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, or the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is used for the gaming of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It can be mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the machine frame 3. That is, one game board 2 (for example, a game board 2 of a predetermined model) can be mounted on either a dedicated frame or a common frame. Further, among the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12 provided on the game board 2, the frame side connector WCN and the board side connector BCN are connected by mounting the game board 2 on the mounting portion 160, and the game frame side is used. The electronic components provided in the above are connected by wiring to the effect control board 12.

Therefore, for example, the gaming board 2 manufactured to be mounted on a dedicated frame is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B at the manufacturing development stage of the pachinko gaming machine manufacturer or after it is delivered to the game store. Even when the gaming board 2 manufactured to be mounted on the common frame is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the effect control board 12 and the electronic parts on the game frame side are connected by wiring. When the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on while the gaming board 2 that does not correspond to the gaming frame is attached, the operation mode of the movable body on the gaming frame side controlled by the effect control CPU 120 is different, so that the effect control is performed. Even if the CPU 120 outputs an operation signal or the like to the movable body on the game frame side, the movable body may not operate or the movable body may malfunction, and by outputting an operation signal that does not correspond to the movable body. There is a possibility that a problem may occur in which an unreasonable load is applied to the motor or the like, which is the drive source, and the machine burns.

Further, as will be described later, when an effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is performed, an image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (see FIG. 18). When a game board 2 that does not correspond to the game board 2 is mounted, the effect control CPU 120 has a stick controller 31A or a push different from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B provided in the game board to which the game board 2 is mounted. There is a possibility that the image of the button 31B will be displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 detects the output from various detection means provided in the gaming frame. Based on the specific information, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 on which the gaming board 2 is mounted is a specific gaming machine frame (for example, a dedicated frame or a common frame), and is a specific gaming machine frame. It is possible to give a notification when it is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the wiring connection state between the effect control board 12 and various electronic components provided in the game frame including the opening / closing frame 50 and the game machine frame 3 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko game machine 1A in which the game frame is a dedicated frame, the effect control board 12 and various electronic components (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C) , Button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, cover body motor 39C) Is provided with a serial conversion IC 130 for converting parallel data into serial data.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B which is a common frame, the effect control board 12 and various electronic components (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C, etc. A serial conversion IC 130 for converting parallel data into serial data is provided between the stick motor 35D, the button sensor 36A, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D).

The serial conversion IC 130 shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B outputs serial data to the input port 131 to which detection signals (parallel data) from various electronic components are input and to the serial communication unit 133 of the effect control board 12. To the input port 131 based on the input state of each detection signal of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a), see FIG. 9) of the input port 131. 16-bit serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal of the above is generated, and the generated serial data can be output from the serial communication unit 132 to the effect control board 12.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, the effect control board 12 is provided on the game board 2 which is detachable from the game machine frame 3, and is provided on the effect control board 12 and the game frame side. Since serial data communication is possible with the frame-side electronic components, the number of wires between the effect control board 12 and each frame-side electronic component can be reduced as compared with the case of communication by parallel data. There is.

Note that FIG. 8 shows a circuit configuration in which parallel data input from various electronic components of the game frame is converted into serial data by the serial conversion IC 130 and output to the effect control board 12, but the pachinko game machine 1A is shown. , 1B has a parallel conversion IC (not shown) that converts various control information output as serial data from the effect control board 12 into parallel data, although not shown in detail, and converted by the parallel conversion IC. Parallel data can be output to various electronic components of the game frame (for example, vibration motor 35C, rocket motor 37C, cover body motor 39C, stick motor 35D).

Further, in FIG. 8, for convenience of explanation, a mode in which detection signals from all electronic components provided on the game frame side are input to the input port 131 of one serial conversion IC 130 is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. A plurality of serial conversion ICs 130 may be provided without limitation. Further, it is preferable that the serial conversion IC 130 is provided at a predetermined position of the game frame (for example, the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50).

Further, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the cross button 46, the rocket 45, and the cover body 28 are detected in the input port 131. A detection signal (a signal indicating an ON state) is output from the sensor. Then, the serial conversion IC 130 confirms the input state (on state, off state) of each signal of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a), see FIG. 9) of the input port 131, and goes to the input port 131. 16-bit serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal of the above is generated and output to the serial communication unit 133 of the effect control board 12 via the serial communication unit 132.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the serial conversion IC 130 inputs the signals of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a)) of the input port 131. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which serial data capable of specifying the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 is generated and output to the effect control board 12 is illustrated. When the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B was turned on, the effect control CPU 120 output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the serial conversion IC 130, and the input capture signal (latch signal) was input. The serial conversion IC 130 may generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the drive signals from the vibration motor 35C, the rocket motor 37C, the cover body motor 39C, and the stick motor 35D are input to the input port 131. Instead, the drive signal of the motor is output from the effect control CPU 120, and each motor is driven based on the drive signal, so that the drive signal is input to the input port 131.

In this embodiment, the mode in which the drive signal is input to the input port 131 by driving each motor based on the output of the drive signal of the motor from the effect control CPU 120 is illustrated, but the present invention exemplifies. The present invention is not limited to this, and a detection means capable of detecting the motor may be provided so that the detection signal from the detection means is input when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9A, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which the gaming frame is a dedicated frame, the detection signals from various electronic parts of the gaming frame are the port numbers 0 (H) to 7 (A) of the input port 131. ), 0 (h) to 7 (a), and as shown in FIG. 9 (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 1B which is a common frame, the detection signals from various electronic parts of the game frame are input ports 131. It is designed to be input to each port number 0 (H) to 7 (A) and 0 (h) to 7 (a) in.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the button sensor 35 is connected to the port number 3 (E) for both the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, and the stick origin position sensor 35A and the stick pull position sensor 35B are , Pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are both connected to port numbers 7 (A) and 0 (h), and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D are connected to port numbers 4 (d) to 7 (a) for both pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B. It is connected.

On the other hand, the vibration motor 35C is connected to the port number 2 (F) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A and to the port number 0 (H) in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. That is, the port number to which the detection signal from the vibration motor 35C is input is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Further, the rocket origin position sensor 37A, the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, and the rocket motor 37C are connected to the port numbers 4 (D) to 6 (B) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but the port number 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. It is not connected to (D) to 6 (B). Further, the cover body origin position sensor 39A, the cover body open position sensor 39B, and the cover body motor 39C are connected to the port numbers 1 (g) to 3 (e) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Not connected to port numbers 1 (g) to 3 (e).

As described above, the detection signals input to the input port 131 of the serial conversion IC 130 are the button sensor 35, the stick origin position sensor 35A and the stick pull position sensor 35B, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D are all the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B. Although it is input to a common port number, the vibration motor 35C is input to a different port number for the pachinko game machine 1A and the pachinko game machine 1B, and the rocket origin position sensor 37A, the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, and the rocket motor. For the 37C, the cover body origin position sensor 39A, the cover body open position sensor 39B, and the cover body motor 39C, the detection signal is input to the specific port number of the pachinko game machine 1A, but the specific port number of the pachinko game machine 1B. Is not entered.

That is, in the effect control CPU 120, the port number of the input port 131 to which the detection signal is input differs between the dedicated frame and the common frame even if the detection target is the same detection means, function, and use. At least one of the fact that the detection signal is input to a specific port number in only one of the dedicated frame and the common frame, and that the number of detection signal input ports differs between the dedicated frame and the common frame. Based on the discrimination items of, the dedicated frame and the common frame are discriminated.

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 indicates to which port number of the input port 131 the detection signals from the electronic components of the dedicated frame and the common frame are input. Identifiable data is stored. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to a port number to which a detection signal from a specific electronic component among various electronic components provided in the game frame is input in the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 when the power is turned on. By specifying the serial data to be used and checking whether or not the specified serial data has data indicating the input state of the detection signal, it is determined whether the game frame equipped with the game board 2 is a dedicated frame or a common frame. However, it is possible to perform notification based on the determination result.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. In the main process, first, the first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control. , To the origin position of each movable body (first movable body 300, second movable body 400, third movable body 500L, 500R and fourth movable body 600L, 600R / movable body 700) provided on the game board 2 side. To the origin position of the second initialization process (S51A) for returning and checking the operation, and each movable body (rocket 45, cover body 28, stick controller 31A of pachinko game machine 1B, etc.) provided on the game frame side. The third initialization process (S51B) for returning and confirming the operation is performed. After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs command analysis processing (S54). In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 4) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. Then, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, after executing the effect random number update process (S56) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number, the sub-side error process (S57) is executed, and then the sub-side error process (S57) is executed. After executing the sub-side notification process (S58), the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S51A) of this embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable bodies, and in this embodiment, the order is as follows: 1st movable body 300 → 2nd movable body 400 → 3rd movable body 500L, 500R → 4th movable body 600L, The order of 600R is preset. Therefore, when S101 is executed for the first time, the first movable body 300 is specified as the target movable body. Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target movable body that needs to perform origin detection (S102).

In this embodiment, as the origin detection target movable body for which it is necessary to perform origin detection, only the movable body having the origin position detection sensor is applicable, and the movable body without the origin detection sensor is not applicable. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S101 is any of the movable bodies having the origin position detection sensor, it is determined as "Y" in the determination, while the movable body specified in S101 uses the origin position detection sensor. If it is a movable body that does not have it, it will be determined as "N".

If it is determined to be "N" in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, if it is determined to be "Y" in S102, the process proceeds to S103 to specify the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the movable body to be operated (S103), and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

If it is not located at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and after setting 0 in the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control. (S105), The operation target is the control speed for operating the movable body, which is the same as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 13 and 14) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later. The minimum control speed for operating the movable body is set (S106), and the drive motor of the movable body to be operated, for example, if the movable body to be operated is the first movable body 300, the origin is the first movable body drive motor 303. Driving starts in the position direction, for example, if the movable body to be operated is the first movable body 300, the lever motor 36 is started to be driven in the direction of the origin position (S107), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is counted. Start (S108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. ..

Then, as soon as the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, it shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has reached the value corresponding to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

By driving the drive device of the movable object to be operated (for example, the first movable body drive motor 303, etc.) in the direction of the origin position, the movable object to be operated is positioned at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. If this happens, the drive of the drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S113).

When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the drive of the drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored (S114), and the process proceeds to S130. .. That is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later is not executed for the operation target movable body (the relevant). The origin return error is stored in order to put the movable body to be operated in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In this embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the embodiment in which the operation target movable body is in the dead end state is exemplified. When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the initialization error processing is started and the initialization error processing is executed. 2. By interrupting the initialization process, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (such as the effect control CPU 120) may be put into a non-startable state (dead end state). ..

Further, when the movable body to be operated is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, indicating that the movable body is operated). , The reception of the detection signal of the effect button and the like) is invalidated, and even if the input signal is input, it is preferable to execute a process such as preventing the movable body to be operated from operating.

On the other hand, if the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection has not reached the operation error determination number, the drive motor is stopped and returned to S106, and the processing of S106 to S108 is performed again to move the operation target. The operation of moving the body to the origin position at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initialization operation control) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is started, and the operation shifts to the monitoring state of S109 and S110 described above. ..

Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation of repeatedly moving the operation target movable body to the origin position (initial position) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the movable body to be operated is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

On the other hand, when the determination is "Y" in S104 described above and the process proceeds to S120, 0 is set in the detection operation count counter, the detection operation process data is set (S121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. (S121b). As the timer count of the detection operation process timer, the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number or the like. Further, in the detection operation process data of this embodiment, the minimum speed (FIG. 13, FIG. 13) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) described later is described as the control speed for operating the operation target movable body. The minimum control speed for operating the moving object to be operated at the same operating speed as (see 14) is described (set).

Next, the operation target movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection time operation process data (S122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S123), and the process data is processed. If is not completed, the process returns to S122, and the movable object to be operated is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

In this way, in the operation control at the time of detection, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection, that is, the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initial stage) until the operation process data at the time of detection is completed. At the lowest speed in the conversion operation control), the operation of temporarily leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning to the origin position (initial position) from the position away from the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 13). The position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where the detected portion of each movable body cannot be detected by each origin sensor, and a predetermined position (detection) closer to the origin position than each effect position. When operating position) is set.

If it is determined in the determination of S123 that the set detection operation process data is completed, the drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S124 to determine whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the movable object to be operated is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation count counter (S126). , It is determined whether or not the value of the detection operation number counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection has reached the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S128 to store the origin return error of the operation target movable body (S128), and then proceeds to S130. That is, when the motion target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the motion control at the time of detection, the motion control for actual motion confirmation described later is not executed for the motion target movable body (the motion). The origin return error is stored in order to put the target movable body in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In this embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S127, a mode in which the operation target movable body is in a dead-end state is exemplified. The second initial stage is not limited, and when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the initialization error processing is started and the initialization error processing is executed. By interrupting the conversion process, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 may be put into a non-startable state (dead end state).

Further, when the movable body to be operated is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the operation target movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

In S130 to be executed when it is determined to be "N" in S102, when it is determined to be "Y" in S109, or when it is determined to be "Y" in S124, it has not yet been targeted for operation among the movable bodies. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body exists, and when the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, when the operating target movable body is the third movable body 500), the actual state shown in FIG. Move to the process of performing operation control for operation check. On the other hand, when the remaining movable body exists, the process proceeds to S131 to specify the movable body to be operated next, and then returns to S102 to perform the above-mentioned processing after S102 for the specified movable body to be operated. Do the same.

When S131 is executed when the operation target movable body is the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400 is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and the operation target movable body is the first. 2 When S131 is executed in the case of the movable body 400, the (operation lever 31) is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and the operation target movable body is the (operation lever 31). When S131 is executed, the third movable body 500 is specified as the operating target movable body based on the setting data.

Next, the process shown in FIG. 12 will be described. In S200 shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 is a movable body (confirmation target movable body) whose operation is first confirmed based on the setting data, as in the above-mentioned S101. (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a memory of the origin return error of the target movable body (S201).

If there is a memory of the origin return error of the movable body to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes S202a to S213. By doing so, in this embodiment, the operation control for confirming the actual operation is not performed for the movable body determined to have the origin return error in the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control at the time of detection.

On the other hand, if there is no memory of the origin return error of the movable body to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S202a and the process data for confirming the actual operation corresponding to the movable body to be confirmed is set. That is, if the movable body to be confirmed is the first movable body 300, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the first movable body 300 is set, and if the movable body to be confirmed is the second movable body 400, the second movable body is set. If the actual operation confirmation process data of 400 is set and the confirmation target movable body is (operation lever 31), the actual operation confirmation process data of (operation lever 31) is set and the confirmation target movable body is the third movable body. If it is the body 500, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the third movable body 500 is set. In each of these actual operation confirmation process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the actual operation in the movable body effect in the effect.

Next, the timer count of the process timer for confirming the actual operation is started (S202b). As the timer count of the process timer for confirming the actual operation, a signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number of.

Then, in the set actual operation confirmation process data, the confirmation target movable body is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer (S203), and the process data is completed. It is determined whether or not the process data has been completed (S204), and if the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S203 and the movable body to be confirmed is set according to the timer count value of the process timer for confirming the actual operation at that time. Operate based on the controlled speed.

In this way, until the actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the moving object to be confirmed is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. By doing so, the control speed of the movable body to be confirmed can be sequentially changed in chronological order to accelerate or decelerate the same as the control speed set when the movable body is actually operated in the movable body effect. can.

Then, in the determination of S204, when it is determined that the set actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the drive of the drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the confirmation target movable body is the origin detection target movable body. (S204a). If the confirmed target movable body is not the origin detection target movable body, that is, if the third movable body 500, the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the target accessory is an origin detection target movable body, that is, if the first movable body 300 or the second movable body 400, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation target is movable. It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be confirmed is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-mentioned non-detection operation control is performed (see FIG. 11). The process of S206 to S213 is performed in order to position the movable body to be confirmed at the origin position (initial position).

Specifically, after setting 0 in the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control (S206), the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) is used as the control speed. The minimum control speed for operating the operation target movable body at the same operation speed as the minimum speed in (S207) is set, and the drive device of the confirmation target movable body, for example, if the confirmation target movable body is the first movable body 300. , The first movable body drive motor 303 is started to be driven in the origin position (initial position) direction (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

Then, as soon as the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, it shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has reached the value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

By driving the drive device of the movable body to be confirmed (for example, the first movable body drive motor 303) in the direction of the origin position (initial position), the movable body to be confirmed is positioned at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is activated. When the detection state is reached, it is determined as "Y" in S210 and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the movable body to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S212 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination count (for example, 3). (S213).

If the value of the non-detection operation count counter has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S220. In this embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the embodiment in which the operation target movable body is in the dead end state is exemplified. When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored, and the operation target movable body is thereafter. May not perform the actual operation. Alternatively, by starting the initialization error processing and executing the initialization error processing, the second initialization processing is interrupted, so that the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 May be set to a non-starting state (dead end state).

Further, when the movable body to be operated is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the operation target movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection has not reached the operation error determination number, the process returns to S207 and the processing of S207, S208, and S209 is performed again to confirm the actual operation of the movable body to be confirmed. The operation of moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation at the time of returning to the origin) is started, and the process shifts to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (operation control at the time of non-detection) of repeatedly moving the movable body to be confirmed to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the movable body to be confirmed is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S220.

In S220 to be executed when it is determined as "Y" in S201, when it is determined as "N" in S204a, when it is determined as "Y" in S205, or when it is determined as "Y" in S210. , It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable body among the movable bodies that has not yet been confirmed for operation confirmation, and if the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, the target accessory for operation confirmation is the first. (3 When the movable body is 500), the error recording stored in S114 or S128 is cleared (S222), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining movable body is present, the process proceeds to S221. Next, after specifying the movable body whose operation is to be confirmed, the process returns to S201, and the above-mentioned processes after S201 are similarly executed for the specified target body.

Here, the operation mode and the control content of the movable body by executing the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of detection, and FIG. 14C is the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

In addition, in FIGS. 13 and 14, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control), the detection operation control (short initialization operation control), and the actual operation confirmation operation in the movable body whose origin is to be detected are shown. Only the control (long initialization operation control) will be described, and the description of the movable body that is not the origin detection target movable body will be omitted. Further, although the reciprocating operating distance (rotation range) of the first movable body 300 and the reciprocating operating distance (moving range) such as the reciprocating operating distance (moving range) of the second movable body 400 are not the same, for convenience of explanation, It will be explained using the same conceptual diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13, each movable body is provided so as to be able to reciprocate between the origin position (retracted position, initial position) and the effect position (operable position), and from the origin position to the effect position. The forward movement and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are considered to be actual operations actually performed in the above-mentioned movable body effect and the like.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the detected portion of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed, that is, the origin of the movable body is some reason (for example, when the movable body is transported or installed on a game island). If it has moved from the position, or if it could not return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when the production is executed, the origin return of the movable body cannot be confirmed or it can operate due to step-out, failure, catching, etc. of the motor. Corresponds to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 13 due to a position other than the origin position (for example, when a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as disappearance occurs) or when the game machine moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine). If it is in a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position, such as the position indicated by the black circle), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. When this non-detection motion control is executed, since the movable body is located at a position away from the origin position, the motion is limited to the motion of moving the movable body toward the origin position. Further, when the detected portion of each movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the detection operation control.

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period is determined between the time when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time when the movement of the movable body in the origin position direction is restricted. When the operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may be returned and the vehicle may stop at a position further backward from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the movable body to the more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor. Since it is not necessary to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operating position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control in the second initialization process. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed by the movable body in various effects and the like.

Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 14 (A), 14 (B), and 14 (C) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating each movable body, and are actual movements of the movable body. It is different from the operating speed of. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined movable body, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section and another The movable body was actually operated when the mode was different between the moving sections (for example, sections with and without springs, straight sections and curved sections), and when rising and falling even in the same moving section. The operating speed in the case may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable body, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body, the actual operating speed of each movable body is not always the same. Not the same. When operating multiple movable bodies with stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body, etc. If there is a difference, the actual operating speeds of each movable body will not necessarily be the same.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. Operate the movable body to be confirmed based on the set control speed. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the effect position. Let me. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect of each movable body, the range between the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body is controlled to operate at the speed within, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the second speed faster than the minimum speed are set. It controls each movable body to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) of.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable body, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed or the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, it is assumed that when the movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable body is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. do.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body is reliably controlled by controlling it so that it becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when it is stopped at the effect position. After decelerating to, the origin detection sensor detects the detected part.

As shown in FIG. 14B, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the detection operation control, the actual operation is always confirmed during the period of moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period of moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a speed in which the maximum speed in the detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the actual operation confirmation). The moving body is always controlled to operate based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same speed as the minimum speed in the operation control.

In addition, in the case of motion control at the time of detection, since the motion distance of the movable body is shorter than that of the motion control for actual motion check, the origin detection is performed at the control speed when accelerated in the motion control for actual motion check, that is, at high speed. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to detect the detected part reliably, or the movable body may be damaged by the impact when the movable body returns to the origin position and the movement is restricted from a short distance. It is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14C, when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control, it is always moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. It is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the example, the movable body is always operated based on the lowest control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Take control.

In this case, it is unknown how far the movable body is from the origin position, so if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation In other words, when operated at high speed, the origin detection sensor could not reliably detect the detected part when the movable body returned to the origin position, or the movable body returned to the origin position from a short distance and movement was restricted. Since there is a risk that the movable body or the like may be damaged due to the impact at that time, the operation is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is set. Based on this, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operating speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation motion control corresponding to each movable body and are not the motion speeds common to each movable body, the minimum speeds in each movable body may be different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the operation lever 31 of the first movable portion 302 of the first movable body 300 and the second movable portion 401, 402 of the second movable body 400 has a size, weight, and operation. Since the mode, the operating distance, and the drive mechanism including the drive motor are different, the actual operating speed of the movable body is different even if the same control speed is set. Further, even when different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies are different. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and in order to control the operation so as to operate at the optimum minimum speed for the movable body, a plurality of movable bodies having different modes can be used. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the third initialization process (S51B) of this embodiment. In the third initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first selects the port numbers 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), and 2 (f) of the input port 131 from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130. Serial data, that is, port number 4 (D) to which the detection signal from the rocket origin position sensor 37A of the rocket 45, which is not mounted in the common frame of the pachinko game machine 1B, is input, and the detection signal from the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B. Port number 5 (C) to which is input, port number 1 (g) to which the detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A of the cover body 28 is input, and the detection signal from the cover body open position sensor 39B are input. The serial data of the port number 2 (f) is specified (S61).

Next, it is determined whether or not the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S62), and data indicating the input state of the detection signal (for example, rocket origin position sensor 37A (port number 4 (D)). ) Or the data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A (data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the port number 7 (A)), since there is a high possibility that it is a dedicated frame, the rocket motor 37C is driven to drive the rocket. After the initialization of 45 (return operation to the origin position) is executed and the serial data of the port number 6 (B) is specified (S63), the cover body motor 39C is driven to initialize the cover body 28 (origin position). (Return operation to) is executed, and the serial data of the port number 3 (e) is specified (S64).

Then, it is determined whether or not both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S65), and both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are used. If the data indicates the input state of the drive signal, it is assumed that the rocket motor 37C and the cover body motor 39C, which are not in the common frame, are mounted, and a dedicated frame flag indicating that the game frame is a dedicated frame is set ( S66), the notification A (see FIG. 16A) indicating that the frame is dedicated is started (S67), and the process is terminated.

When both port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S65, one of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) indicates the input state of the drive signal. It is determined whether or not the data is data (S68), and if one of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, an operation error occurs in the other movable body. Assuming that there is a possibility, the error information about the movable body corresponding to the data in the non-input state of the drive signal is stored (S69), and the process proceeds to S66. That is, when one of the data indicates the input state of the drive signal, there is a high possibility that an operation error has only occurred in the other movable body, so it is determined that the frame is dedicated.

Further, in S68, when one of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, that is, both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are the input states of the drive signal. If the data does not indicate, it is assumed that the rocket motor 37C and the cover body motor 39C may not be mounted in the common frame, and the vibration motor 35C is driven to drive the port numbers 2 (F) and 0 (H). Specify the serial data (S70).

Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 2 (F) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S71), and when the port number 2 (F) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the game is played. Since there is a high possibility that the frame is a dedicated frame, the process proceeds to S69. On the other hand, if the port number 2 (F) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal, that is, if the port number 0 (H) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, it may be a common frame. , Since it is not possible to specify whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, the process proceeds to S72. In other words, when the input state of the detection signal from the operating means was confirmed, it was determined that there was a high possibility that it was a dedicated frame, but when the input state of the drive signal from the movable body was confirmed, it was possible that it was a common frame. By the determination, it is not possible to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and it is determined that there is a high possibility that some abnormality has occurred.

When there is no data indicating the input state of the detection signal in S62, the vibration motor 35C is driven to specify the serial data of the port number 0 (H) (S80). Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 0 (H) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S81), and when the port number 0 (H) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, it is common. Assuming that there is a high possibility that it is a frame, the stick motor 35D is driven to initialize the stick controller 31A (return operation to the origin position), and the serial data of the port number 1 (G) is specified (S82). Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 1 (G) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S83), and if the port number 1 (G) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the data is set to S85. If the port number 1 (G) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the process proceeds to S85 after storing the error information of the stick controller 31A corresponding to the data in the non-input state of the drive signal (S84). Then, a common frame flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1B is a common frame is set (S85), notification B indicating that the frame is a common frame (see FIG. 16B) is started (S86), and processing is performed. To finish.

In this way, by executing the initialization of the stick controller 31A (returning operation to the origin position) before confirming the input state of the drive signal of the port number 1 (G), the stick controller 31A is present. However, it is determined that the port number 1 (G) is not a common frame because the port number 1 (G) does not become the data indicating the input state of the drive signal because the stick controller 31A has moved to a position deviated from the origin position for some reason. You can avoid doing it.

If port number 0 (H) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S81, it may be a dedicated frame, so whether port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal. (S87), and if the port number 2 (F) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, it is highly possible that the frame is dedicated, so the process proceeds to S63, and the port number 2 (F) is the drive signal. If the data does not indicate the input state of, it is difficult to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, so the process proceeds to S72.

If the port number 2 (F) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S71 or S87, it is impossible (or difficult to specify) whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, so that the pachinko is a common frame. A common frame flag indicating that the game machine 1B is set (S72), notification C indicating that the game machine 1B is used (see FIG. 16C) is started (S73), and processing is completed.

In S72, it is not possible to specify whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, but by setting a common frame flag indicating that it is a common frame with higher versatility than the dedicated frame, it is for effect control. The CPU 120 tentatively assumes a common frame and exemplifies a form in which subsequent control can be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated frame flag indicating that the CPU 120 is a dedicated frame is set. It may be set, or it may be set with a separate flag indicating that it is not identifiable.

Further, when the error state of the movable body is stored in S69 and S84, the error state is not erased unless the RAM is cleared. Therefore, the movable body stored as the error state when proceeding to the subsequent processing is performed. Since it is possible to prevent the operation control (the operation target movable body is in a dead-end state), the operation control of the movable body that may have a problem can be executed to drive the motor or the like. It is possible to suppress the load.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes various notifications A to C started in S67, S73, and S86 in S58 in the effect control main process. Specifically, the notification A and the notification B end at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the notification, and the notification C has a predetermined release condition (for example, a power off state). , RAM clear, etc.) may be satisfied.

Next, a notification mode of various notifications executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the game machine frame 3 is a dedicated frame, as shown in FIG. 16A, the display screen of the effect display device 5 shows that the game machine frame is a “dedicated frame”. The notification A for displaying the image G1 is executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the gaming machine frame 3 is a common frame, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display screen of the effect display device 5 displays "the gaming machine frame is a" common frame ". The notification B for displaying the image G2 "is" is executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine frame 3 is a dedicated frame or a common frame, as shown in FIG. 16C, the effect display device 5 is displayed. Notification C that displays the image G3 on the screen, "Please check the combination of the game machine frame and the game board or the operating status of the movable body", and lights the effect LEDs 9 on the left and right of the display screen in a predetermined mode. To execute.

In this way, the notification of whether the gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the dedicated frame and the pachinko gaming machine 1B of the common frame, respectively. By using the effect display device 5 (5A), the player can be recognizable to know whether the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame, or whether it cannot be specified. Can be done. Further, as in the notification C, the notification may be performed by using other notification means such as the effect LED 9 and the celestial light emitting unit 47 other than the effect display device 5.

Further, when the operation error of the movable body is stored in S114, S128, and S214 in the second initialization process of S51A, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display screen of the effect display device 5 as shown in FIG. 16 (D). In addition to displaying the image G4 of "vibration motor error", the notification D for lighting the effect LEDs 9 on the left and right of the display screen in a predetermined mode may be executed.

Further, when the error information of the movable body corresponding to the data in the non-input state is stored in S69 or S84 in the third initialization process of S51B, that is, there is a possibility that an operation error of the movable body on the game frame side has occurred. In a certain case, as shown in FIG. 16E, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image G5, which is a “frame movable body error”, on the display screen of the effect display device 5, and also displays the effect on the upper left and right sides of the display screen. The notification E for lighting the LED 9 in a predetermined mode may be executed. Further, in the case of an operation error of the stick controller, the image G6 "stick controller error" is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the sky light emitting unit 47, which is only in the common frame above the display screen, is lit in a predetermined manner. Notification E may be executed.

Further, in FIG. 16, as an example of the notification means, a mode in which a display device such as an effect display device 5 and a light emitting body such as an effect LED 9 and a celestial light emitting unit 47 are described has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. For example, speakers 8L, 8R and the like capable of outputting sound may be applied as the notification means.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S55) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5 according to the storage contents of the hold storage buffer. The hold display update process for updating the display is executed (S172).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any of the processes S173 to S179 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern specification command is received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S174).

Effect symbol change start process (S174): Control so that change of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S175).

Processing during effect symbol change (S175): Controls the switching timing and the like of each change state (change rate) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S176).

Effect symbol change stop processing (S176): Control to stop the change of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all the symbols. conduct. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S177) or the variation pattern designation command reception wait process (S173).

Jackpot display process (S177): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a jackpot. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit in-game process (S178).

Process during big hit game (S178): Control during big hit game. For example, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or the designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S179).

Big hit end effect processing (S179): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has a predetermined timing (for example, a movable body effect) in the effect symbol changing process (S175), the jackpot display process (S177), the jackpot game process (S178), the jackpot game process (S178), and the like. At the timing when the execution condition is satisfied), it is possible to execute the movable body effect of moving the movable body between the origin position and the effect position.

As described above, in the pachinko game machines 1A and 1B as the embodiment of the present invention, the game board 2 (first mechanism body) and the game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 can be attached and detached are attached / detached. The game board 2 has a game board 2 and a CPU 120 for effect control as a control means capable of controlling the game frame, and has a plurality of types of game frames (for example, a dedicated frame) including a specific game frame (for example, a dedicated frame). , A dedicated frame and a common frame), and the game frame is a detection means (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick) capable of detecting the state (position) of an operating means or a movable body mounted on the game frame. A pull position sensor 35B, a button sensor 36A, a rocket origin position sensor 37A, a rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, a cross button sensor 38A to 38D, a cover body origin position sensor 39A, a cover body open position sensor 39B, etc.) are provided in the game frame. The serial conversion IC 130 can generate serial data capable of specifying the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 is output from the game frame. Based on the detection specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130), it is determined whether or not the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or common frame), and the dedicated frame (or common frame) is determined. A notification is given when it is determined that the frame).

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the game board 2 for the common frame being mounted on the dedicated frame. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem due to the game board 2 for the dedicated frame being mounted on the common frame.

Specifically, by mounting the game board 2 on the game board 2, the effect control CPU 120 provided on the game board 2 inputs a detection signal to the input port 131 by the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. By checking the state, not only is it determined whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, but also the determination result is notified by the effect display device 5, so whether or not the game board 2 and the game frame match. The operator can easily recognize this. Therefore, when the power is turned on and the game is played in a state where the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, the movable body mounted on the game frame mounted by the effect control CPU 120 is referred to as the movable body. Is driven based on the motion control data of different movable bodies, which causes problems such as a load applied to the motor, etc., which is the drive source of the movable body, and seizure, or damage to the parts of the movable body. Can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a frame body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50, etc.) provided with a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area, and a movable body, as described in FIG. 22 and later. (For example, a first movable body 300, etc.), and the window portion is provided on the first transmissive member (for example, the first transmissive body 250) and the game area side of the first transmissive member. It has a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a second transmission member (for example, a second transmission body 260) in which a notch portion is formed, and is between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. At least a part of the movable body can enter the formed space (for example, the space portion S) through the hole portion or the notch portion. Therefore, when the game board 2 having such a first movable body 300 is attached to the common frame, the window portion 51 of the common frame has a hole portion or a notch portion through which the first movable body 300 can enter. Therefore, when the first movable body 300 is operated, the first movable body 300 may collide with the window portion 51 and be damaged. Therefore, by performing the above, the game board for the dedicated frame is used. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem due to the fact that 2 is mounted on the common frame.

Further, in this embodiment, the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is controlled by the control means (the effect control CPU 120) provided on the game board 2 and the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the plurality of types of game frames. Since it is possible to specify the operating means and the movable body to be detected by using a plurality of detecting means, for example, identification information that can identify each of the plurality of types of game frames is provided on the game board 2. The control means can be easily performed without the trouble of making a determination by reading the identification information.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 identifies serial data of a specific port number in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B, and detects signals in the specified serial data. Whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined depending on whether or not there is data indicating the input state of.

By doing so, it is possible to suitably determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame). For example, a specific port number (for example, 4 (for example, 4) among a plurality of port numbers to which detection signals from a plurality of origin position sensors capable of detecting that a movable body mounted only in a dedicated frame is at the origin position is input. D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) serial data is specified, and a dedicated frame or a common frame is used depending on whether or not the specified serial data contains data indicating the input state of the detection signal. By determining whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame), it can be suitably determined.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies serial data of a plurality of specific port numbers in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B, and uses the specified serial data. Whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined depending on whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal.

By doing so, it is possible to suitably determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame). For example, a plurality of port numbers (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C)) to which detection signals from a plurality of origin position sensors capable of detecting that a movable body mounted only on a dedicated frame is at the origin position are input. ), 1 (g), 2 (f)), and determine whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether or not the specified serial data contains data indicating the input state of the detection signal. By doing so, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame), as compared with the case where the determination is based on the serial data of one port number.

Further, the game frame includes an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.), and the serial conversion IC 130 is a detection signal from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to the input port 131. It is possible to generate serial data that can specify the input state of the above and output it to the effect control board 12.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an operation abnormality. In addition, the operation means that can be operated by the player is likely to be installed in many models regardless of the dedicated frame or the common frame, and the design, operation mode, etc. may be changed in various game frames. Therefore, if the input state of the detection signal from the operating means is used, it becomes easy to specify the type of the game frame.

Further, the game frame includes an movable movable body (for example, a rocket 45 of a dedicated frame, a cover body 48, a stick controller 31A, etc.), and the serial conversion IC 130 includes a vibration motor 35C to an input port 131, a rocket motor 37C, and the like. It is possible to generate serial data that can specify the input state of the drive signal from the cover body motor 39C and the stick motor 35D and output it to the effect control board 12.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an operation abnormality. In addition, the movable body is likely to be mounted on many models regardless of whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and there is a high possibility that the design, operation mode, etc. will be changed in various game frames. , If the input state of the drive signal from the movable body is used, it becomes easy to specify the type of the game frame.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs notification using notification means (for example, effect display devices 5, 5A, effect LED 9 and the like) commonly provided in a plurality of types of game frames.

By doing so, it is possible to appropriately notify any type of game frame. That is, even when the game board 2 is attached to a common frame other than the dedicated frame, it is possible to notify that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem.

Further, the game can be executed even if the effect control CPU 120 notifies the game, and the use of the detection target object to be notified is restricted. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 can play a game while keeping the movable body in which the error information is stored in the third initialization process of S51B in the dead end state.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality. Specifically, since it is possible to prevent the effect control CPU 120 from executing control based on inappropriate control data, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, the pachinko game machines 1A and 1B as examples of the present invention include a game board 2 (first mechanism body) and a game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 can be attached and detached. The game board 2 has an effect control CPU 120 as a control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and has a plurality of types of game frames (for example, a dedicated frame) including a specific game frame (for example, a dedicated frame). The game frame is removable from the common frame), and the game frame is a detection means (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A, a stick pull position sensor 35B) that can detect the state (position) of an operating means or a movable body mounted on the game frame. , Button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, etc.) Can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 has the detection specific information output from the game frame. Based on (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130), it is possible to determine whether or not the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame).

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the game board 2 for the common frame being mounted on the dedicated frame. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem due to the game board 2 for the dedicated frame being mounted on the common frame.

Specifically, by mounting the game board 2 on the game board 2, the effect control CPU 120 provided on the game board 2 inputs a detection signal to the input port 131 by the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. By checking the state, it is determined whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame. Therefore, when the power is turned on and the game is played in a state where the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, the movable body mounted on the game frame mounted by the effect control CPU 120 is referred to as the movable body. Is driven based on the motion control data of different movable bodies, which causes problems such as a load applied to the motor, etc., which is the drive source of the movable body, and seizure, or damage to the parts of the movable body. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization operation control of the movable body in S63 and S64 in the third initialization process of S51B, thereby driving a drive signal from the motor for driving the movable body. Although the embodiment for specifying the input state of the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and each detection means changes the detection status by executing the initialization operation control, and the effect control CPU 120 May specify the type of the game frame by specifying the serial data of the port number to which the detection signal from the origin position detection sensor of the movable body is input when the initialization operation control is executed.

By doing so, an accurate judgment can be made. Specifically, by executing the initialization (returning operation to the origin position) of the rocket 45 and the cover body 28 before confirming the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor of the movable body, the rocket 45 and the cover body Despite the presence of 28, it is determined that it is not a dedicated frame because the data does not indicate the input state of the detection signal because the movable body has moved to a position deviated from the origin position for some reason. You can avoid it.

Since the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the cross button 46, which are the operating means, are always located at the origin position by an urging means (not shown) or the like, the initialization process is executed in this embodiment. Although the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor is confirmed without doing so, the input state of the detection signal may be confirmed after the initialization process is executed. Further, the movable body may be specified by checking the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor without executing the initialization process.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the third initialization process of S51B, after determining the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted, an embodiment in which the determination result is notified is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. After determining the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted, it is not always necessary to notify the determination result. In this case, the game may be played while the game board 2 is mounted on the non-regular game frame, but the effect control CPU 120 causes an error state of the movable body in the third initialization process of S51B. Since it is memorized, the movable body does not operate, but it can be avoided that it operates under a load.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game board 2 of the dedicated frame is mounted on the common frame or when the game board 2 of the common frame is mounted on the dedicated frame, that is, the game board 2 is mounted on the non-regular game frame. Even in this case, when the type of the mounted game frame can be specified, the embodiment in which the specified type of the game frame is notified is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board 2 is not. When it is attached to a regular game frame or a regular game frame, it is notified that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match or match, even if the type of the game frame is not identifiable. May be good. Further, the error notification may be performed only when it is determined that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, and the notification may not be performed when it is determined that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match. Alternatively, when the game board 2 is attached to a non-regular game frame, it may be in a state where it is impossible to play a game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted cannot be specified, a mode for notifying that the game frame cannot be specified is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is not possible to specify, the game board 2 and the game frame may be notified so that they do not match, or an error may be notified.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of determining whether the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame in the third initialization process of S51B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is determined whether or not the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame. That is, it may be determined whether or not it is a specific game frame (for example, a dedicated frame or a dedicated frame).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode of executing a process of determining whether the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame in the third initialization process of S51B has been exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted is either a dedicated frame or a common frame, and the initialization process of the movable body of the game frame (control of the return operation to the origin position). It may be performed separately from the process of determining whether or not. That is, if at least a process of specifying whether the type of the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame is performed, the determination result is notified and the game is played based on the determination result. It suffices to control the electronic components on the frame side.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines a specific port number, that is, a dedicated frame and a common frame from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side in the third initialization process of S51B. An example is exemplified in a mode in which serial data of a possible port number is specified and whether or not the specified data is a dedicated frame depending on whether or not there is data indicating an input state of a detection signal. For example, it may be determined whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the input time of a specific signal output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side.

For example, when the movable body mounted on the dedicated frame and the movable body mounted on the common frame are returned to the origin position by the initialization operation control, after the movable body is detected by the origin position detection sensor. If the time until the movable body is stopped is different, it is possible to determine whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame by the difference in the time when the signal from the origin position detection sensor is input, so input. Even when the number of signals input to the port and the input bits (port number) are the same, it is possible to determine whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the third initialization process of S51B for specifying the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is controlled to return to the origin position of the movable body provided on the game board 2 side. Although the embodiment to be executed after the second initialization process is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third initialization process may be executed before the second initialization process. The third initialization process and the second initialization process may be performed together in one initialization process.

Further, when the third initialization process is executed before the second initialization process, it is determined in the third initialization process that the game board 2 and the game frame do not match, or the game frame. When it is determined that the type of is unspecified, the processing after the second initialization processing may not be executed. By doing so, the game is played in a state where the game board 2 and the game frame do not match. It is possible to prevent the problem from occurring due to the above.

Next, a modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a dedicated frame, and FIGS. 18 (D) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a common frame.

As shown in FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 can perform an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, for example, at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display or a big hit game state. As an operation promotion effect, it is possible to display an image prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

Specifically, in the case of the dedicated frame, in the operation promotion effect of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 18A, the image G10 "press !!" and the image G11 corresponding to the push button 31B of the dedicated frame are used. Is displayed, and in the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 18B, an image G12 "close !!" and an image G13 corresponding to the stick controller 31A of the dedicated frame are displayed. ..

On the other hand, in the case of the common frame, in the operation promotion effect of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 18D, the image G10 "press !!" and the image G11 corresponding to the push button 31B of the common frame. Is displayed, and in the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 18 (E), the image G12 "close !!" and the image corresponding to the stick controller 31A of the common frame are displayed. An image G23 different from the existing image G13 is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may display an image prompting the ball removal at a timing when the ball removal is required, for example, during a big hit game. Specifically, in the case of a dedicated frame that does not have a lower plate, as shown in FIG. 18C, the image G14 "Please pull out the ball" is displayed, but the image G14 that has the lower plate 91 is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (F), an image G24 different from the image G14 is displayed, such as "The lower plate is full. Please pull out the ball."

In the above embodiment, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 provided on the game board 2 mounted on the dedicated frame stores the operation control data and the image data corresponding to the dedicated frame, and the game board 2 mounted on the common frame. Since the operation control data and image data corresponding to the common frame are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 provided in the above, the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame can be mounted on the common frame or the common frame can be supported. When the game board 2 is mounted on a dedicated frame, that is, when the game board 2 is mounted on a non-regular (non-corresponding) game frame, the motion control of the movable body is executed based on the non-corresponding motion control data. The image of the operating means will be displayed based on the unsupported image data.

Here, in the case where one game board 2 can be used by being attached to both the game machine frame 3 which is a dedicated frame and the game machine frame 3 which is a common frame, the effect control board 12 The ROM 121 contains motion control data and image data of a movable body corresponding to a dedicated frame, motion control data and image data of a movable body corresponding to a common frame, that is, motion control data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of game frames. Image data is stored in advance, and depending on whether the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, the motion control data or image data of the movable body corresponding to the set flag is used. By making it possible to perform motion control and display control based on the above, it is possible to perform control corresponding to the movable body and the operating means of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted.

By doing so, when the game board 2 is attached to the dedicated frame, for example, the display control and the movable body as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C are based on the control data corresponding to the dedicated frame. When the game board 2 is mounted on the common frame, for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (D) to 18 (F), based on the control data corresponding to the common frame. Since display control and motion control of the movable body can be executed, motion control can be executed without imposing a load on electronic parts such as motors, and control for displaying an image that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player is executed. It becomes possible to do.

As described above, in the pachinko game machines 1A and 1B as the embodiment of the present invention, the game board 2 (first mechanism body) and the game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 can be attached and detached are provided. The game board 2 has a game board 2 and a CPU 120 for effect control as a control means capable of controlling the game frame, and has a plurality of types of game frames (for example, dedicated frames) including a specific game frame (for example, a dedicated frame). It is removable from the frame and the common frame), and the game frame is a detection means (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position) that can detect the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. A serial provided in the game frame with a sensor 35B, a button sensor 36A, a rocket origin position sensor 37A, a rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, a cross button sensor 38A to 38D, a cover body origin position sensor 39A, a cover body open position sensor 39B, etc.). The conversion IC 130 can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 has the detection output from the game frame. Based on the specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130), it is determined whether or not the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame), and the effect is produced based on the determination result. (For example, the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 18, the ball removal error effect, and the like) can be performed.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the game board 2 for the common frame being mounted on the dedicated frame. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem due to the game board 2 for the dedicated frame being mounted on the common frame.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect according to the state of each of the plurality of types of second mechanisms based on the result of the determination. For example, when the dedicated frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the dedicated frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18A to 18C), and S51B is displayed. When the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of No. 1, the effect of displaying the image corresponding to the common frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18D to 18F).

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the game frame.

Further, the plurality of types of game frames include a common frame having an operable movable body (for example, the stick controller 31A of the common frame), and the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of the common frame, for example, in FIG. 18 (E). In the case of performing the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A as shown, the effect of raising the stick controller 31A to the ascending position may be executed.

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the game frame.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is produced according to the type of the game frame in the effect symbol changing process and the jackpot game process based on the result of specifying the game frame type in the third initialization process of S51B. , See FIG. 18).

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the game frame.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a dedicated frame when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and at a predetermined effect timing such as during a symbol variation display or during a jackpot gaming state. It is possible to produce the effect according to the determination result. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 sets the dedicated frame flag in the third initialization process of S51B, the effect is performed to display the image corresponding to the dedicated frame at each effect timing (FIGS. 18A to 18 (A) to (FIG. 18A). (C)), when the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, the effect of displaying the image corresponding to the common frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18 (D) to 18 (F)). ).

By doing so, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the type of the game frame.

Next, a modification 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a third initialization process according to the second modification of the present invention.

In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 performs operation control and display control based on operation control data and image data according to the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag set in the third initialization process of S51B. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting changeover switch 55 connected to the effect control board 12 is provided with either a control corresponding to a dedicated frame or a control corresponding to a common frame. A function that can be switched by a store clerk of the amusement park or the like may be added, and the effect control CPU 120 may be controlled according to the content set by the setting changeover switch 55.

Here, an example of the third initialization process in the case where the effect control CPU 120 can perform control according to the content set by the setting changeover switch 55 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the third initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting content by the setting changeover switch 55 is set in the dedicated frame (S301). In the case of the dedicated frame, the serial data of the port numbers 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), and 2 (f) in the input port 131 from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130, that is, the non-serial data. The detection signal from the rocket origin position sensor 37A of the rocket 45, which is not mounted in the common frame of the regular pachinko game machine 1B, is input to the port number 4 (D), and the detection signal from the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B is input. Port number 5 (C), port number 1 (g) to which the detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A of the cover body 28 is input, and port number 2 to which the detection signal from the cover body open position sensor 39B is input. The serial data of (f) is specified (S302).

Next, it is determined whether or not the specified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S303), and data indicating the input state of the detection signal (for example, rocket origin position sensor 37A (port number 4 (D)). ) Or the data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A (data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the port number 7 (A)), since there is a high possibility that it is a dedicated frame, the rocket motor 37C is driven to drive the rocket. After the initialization of 45 (return operation to the origin position) is executed and the serial data of the port number 6 (B) is specified (S304), the cover body motor 39C is driven to initialize the cover body 28 (origin position). (Return operation to) is executed, and the serial data of the port number 3 (e) is specified (S305).

Then, it is determined whether or not both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S306), and both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are used. If the data indicates the input state of the drive signal, it is assumed that the rocket motor 37C and the cover body motor 39C, which are not in the common frame, are mounted, and a dedicated frame flag indicating that the game frame is a dedicated frame is set ( S307), the notification A (see FIG. 16A) indicating that the frame is dedicated is started (S308), and the process is terminated.

In S301, when the setting content by the setting changeover switch 55 is not set in the dedicated frame, that is, when it is set in the common frame, the serial data of the port numbers 3 (E) and 7 (A) is specified (S310). Next, it is determined whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S311), and if there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal, the vibration motor 35C is driven, and if there is a common frame, the detection signal is transmitted. After specifying the serial data of the input port number 0 (H) (S312), it is determined whether or not the port number 0 (H) is the data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S313).

When the port number 0 (H) is the data indicating the input state of the detection signal, the stick motor 335C is driven to execute the initialization of the stick controller 31A (return operation to the origin position), and the port number 1 (G). ) Is specified (S314), and then it is determined whether or not the port number 1 (G) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S315). Then, when the port number 1 (G) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, since there is a stick motor 35D mounted only in the common frame, a common frame flag indicating that the port number 1 (G) is a common frame is set. (S316), the notification B (see FIG. 16B) indicating that the frame is common is started (S317), and the process is terminated.

Further, when there is no serial data in S303, when both port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S306, when there is no data indicating the input state of the detection signal in S311. , When the port number 0 (H) is not the data indicating the input state of the signal in S313, or when the port number 1 (G) is not the data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S315, it is a dedicated frame. Since it is not possible to specify whether it is a common frame or a common frame, a common frame flag indicating that the pachinko game machine 1B is a common frame is set (S318), and notification C indicating that the frame is a common frame C (FIG. 16 (C)). ) Is started (S319), and the process is terminated.

In this way, the game board 2 (first mechanism body) and the game frame (second mechanism body) to which the game board 2 can be attached and detached are provided, and the game board 2 can control the game board 2 and the game frame. A setting means (for example, a setting changeover switch 55) capable of setting either the effect control CPU 120 as the control means and the type of the regular game frame of the game board 2 or the type of the non-regular game frame of the game board 2. ), And can be attached to and detached from the game frame (for example, a dedicated frame and a common frame), and the game frame can detect the state (position) of the operating means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. Means (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position. The serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame and equipped with a sensor (39B, etc.) can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game board 2 matches the type of the game frame set by the setting changeover switch 55 based on the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the game board 2 being attached to the non-regular game frame. Specifically, when the game board 2 is mounted on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 sets the game board 2 with the setting changeover switch 55 based on the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. In order to determine whether or not it matches the type of the game frame, that is, whether or not it is attached to the regular game frame, even if there are many types of game frames, the game board 2 and the game frame match. It can be easily determined whether or not it is.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the first initialization operation control corresponding to one game frame among a plurality of types of game frames (for example, S304 and S305 of the third initialization process of S51B) and other game frames. It is possible to execute the second initialization operation control (for example, S314 of the third initialization process of S51B), and based on the detection specific information at the time of execution of each of the first initialization operation control and the second initialization operation control. The type of the game frame may be determined.

By doing so, an accurate judgment can be made.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the first initialization operation control corresponding to one game frame among a plurality of types of game frames (for example, S304 and S305 of the third initialization process of S51B) and other game frames. The second initialization operation control (for example, S314 of the third initialization process of S51B) can be executed, and the setting content of the setting changeover switch 55 is confirmed in S301 of the third initialization process of S51B and dedicated. If it is set in the frame, the initialization operation control corresponding to the dedicated frame is executed in 304 and S305, and if it is set in the common frame, the initialization operation control corresponding to the common frame is executed in S312 and S314. , The type of the game frame is determined based on the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130.

By doing so, an accurate judgment can be made. Specifically, when the game board 2 is mounted on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 executes only S304 and S305 when the setting changeover switch 55 is set in the dedicated frame in the third initialization process of S51B. However, when the setting changeover switch 55 is set to the common frame, only S314 needs to be executed. Therefore, even if there are many types of game frames, it is easy to check whether the game board 2 and the game frame match. Can be determined.

Next, a modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the third modification of the present invention.

In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the operation control data and the image data corresponding to the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag set in the third initialization process of S51B in the effect control process process in S55. Although the mode of performing the operation control and the display control is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 20, as the effect control process process in S55, the first one corresponding to the dedicated frame in advance. The effect control process process (S55A) and the second effect control process process (S55B) corresponding to the common frame are made executable, and when the set flag is a dedicated frame, the first effect control process process (S55A) Is executed, and if the set flag is a common frame, the second effect control process process (S55B) may be executed.

Next, a modification 4 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 21A and 21B are views for explaining a modification 4 of the present invention, in which FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing a main part of a dedicated frame, and FIG. 21B is a perspective view showing a main part of a common frame.

In the above-mentioned Examples and Modifications 1 to 3, the gaming board 2 exemplifies a form in which the gaming machine 2 can be attached to both the dedicated frame and the common frame for the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame is mounted on the common frame or the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame is mounted on the dedicated frame, it may be difficult to play the game.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 21A, a convex portion 800 is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame, and the convex portion 800 on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the dedicated frame is provided. While the concave portion 801 capable of accommodating the convex portion 800 is formed at the position corresponding to the above, the concave portion 801 is formed at the position corresponding to the convex portion 800 on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the common frame as shown in FIG. 21 (B). do not. By doing so, when the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame is attached to the common frame, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is to be closed, the convex portion 800 abuts on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 and cannot be closed. Can be difficult to do.

Further, a part of the movable body provided on the game board 2 of the dedicated frame protrudes toward the opening / closing frame 50 at the origin position, and is housed in the window portion 51 side protruding forward when the opening / closing frame 50 is closed. Even if the game board 2 of this dedicated frame is attached to the common frame, even if the opening / closing frame 50 of the common frame is to be closed, the convex portion 800 abuts on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 and cannot be closed. This makes it possible to prevent the closed opening / closing frame 50 from coming into contact with the movable body protruding forward from the game board 2 and damaging the movable body.

Although not particularly shown, a concave portion is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame, and a concave portion capable of accommodating the convex portion at a position corresponding to the convex portion on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the common frame. On the other hand, it is possible not to form a concave portion at a position corresponding to the convex portion on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the dedicated frame. When attached, even if an attempt is made to close the opening / closing frame 50, the convex portion abuts on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 and cannot be closed, so that it is possible to make the game difficult.

As described above, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the non-regular gaming machine frame 3, the opening / closing frame 50 cannot be closed, making it difficult to play the game. By allowing the game to be played with the board 2 attached, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the electronic components of the game frame.

Further, in the above, the form in which the game board 2 can be mounted on both the dedicated frame and the common frame is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board 2 is mounted on the non-regular game frame. That is, the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame can be mounted only on the dedicated frame, and the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame may be mounted only on the common frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the dedicated frame, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1A provided so that the window portion 51 protrudes forward is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The window portion 51 may not protrude forward as in the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine which is an example of a gaming machine, the gaming board 2 is used as the first mechanism body, and the opening / closing frame is used as the second mechanism body to which the first mechanism body can be attached and detached. Although the embodiment to which the gaming frame including the 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is another example of the gaming machine. The first mechanism is a variable display unit having a visible area in which a variable display device such as a reel can be visually recognized and an effect control board is provided, and the second mechanism is a main body to which the variable display unit can be attached and detached. Can be considered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which two types of game frames, a dedicated frame and a common frame, are described as the types of the game frame is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first frame is the dedicated frame. It may have a plurality of types of dedicated frames such as a dedicated frame and a second dedicated frame, and even if the common frame has a plurality of types of common frames such as the first common frame and the second common frame. good. That is, there may be three or more types of game frames. Further, the multiple types of game frames may be classified not only as a dedicated frame and a common frame, but also as a simple decoration (color variation) or a movable body to be mounted, that is, a different type of detection means, etc. It may be classified into a version and a new version. That is, the plurality of types of game frames are the quantity of a plurality of detection means for detecting the state of the game frame (for example, the state of the mounted movable body, the operating means, the drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.). It includes different ones and ones having different designs and operation modes of the detection target of one of the plurality of detection means.

Specifically, the variable display unit has an upper panel, a reel, and an effect control board that can close the upper part of the front opening of the housing and has the viewing area, and the main body has a housing that opens the front and the housing. From the lower panel that closes the lower part of the front opening of the housing and provides operating means related to the progress of the game, which is commonly used for multiple models such as start switch, stop switch, medal insertion part, credit switch, etc. It suffices if it is configured. By doing so, the variable display unit can be attached to and detached from a plurality of types of main bodies including a dedicated body used only for a specific model and a common body that can be used in common with a plurality of models. can.

Next, the window unit 51A constituting the window 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27. 22A is a front view showing the window unit, and FIG. 22B is a rear view showing the window unit. 23A and 23B are a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 23B is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the window unit is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the window unit is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a tubular portion. FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the opening / closing frame and the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the window unit 51A is arranged on the game area 10 side of the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250, and is located at a position corresponding to the opening 2c of the board plate 200. It has a second permeator 260 in which a hole 270 is formed.

The first transmissive body 250 has a plate-shaped portion made of a front transmissive plate 251 made of a transparent glass material, and a first tubular body 252 and a second tubular body formed in a tubular shape by a non-transmissive synthetic resin material. It is composed of a tubular portion made of a body 253 and a tubular portion. The second tubular body 253 is provided inside the first tubular body 252 so as to be fitted from the opening on the back side, and the front opening of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is front-transmitted. It is formed slightly smaller than the plate 251. By inserting the front transmission plate 251 through the opening on the back side of the first tubular body 252 and further fitting the second tubular body 253 from the back side, the front The peripheral edge portion of the transmission plate 251 is sandwiched by the opening peripheral edge portions on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253.

The first tubular body 252 has a tubular portion and a plate-shaped flange portion 256 formed so as to spread from the rear opening peripheral edge portion of the tubular portion to the periphery. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the first tubular body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular body 253 are plated and reinforced by the plating process.

In the second cylindrical body 253, screws N1 are attached to a plurality of mounting holes formed in the rear opening peripheral edge portion, and a plurality of the screws N1 are formed in the rear opening peripheral edge portion of the first tubular body 252. By being screwed into the hole, it is integrated into the first cylindrical body 252 to form a tubular portion, and is sandwiched by the opening peripheral portions on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253. The front transmission plate 251 is also integrated to form the first transmission body 250. The peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251 and the peripheral edge of the opening on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are joined via an adhesive or the like.

The first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are formed so that the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion is longer than the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion, and in particular, FIG. 27. As shown in the above, the front transmission plate 251 has a substantially triangular shape in a vertical cross-sectional view, and is arranged so as to be tilted downward toward the rear side, that is, in a tilted posture in which the upper end is tilted toward the front side.

The above-mentioned upper plate 90 is provided at a position below the window portion 51. Since the upper part of the upper plate 90 is open so that a game ball for playing a game can be thrown in, if the first transmissive body 250 protrudes above the upper plate 90, it interferes with the throwing of the game ball. It ends up. Further, the first permeator 250 is provided so as to project forward from the member forming the upper plate 90. Therefore, the front transmission plate 251 is located on the rear side from the upper side to the lower side so that the upper end is located in front of the front end of the member forming the upper plate 90 and the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper plate 90. It is arranged so as to be inclined to.

In the present embodiment, in the tubular portion composed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion is extremely shorter than the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion. The present invention is not limited to this, and the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion may be substantially the same, and the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion is the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion. It may be shorter than the dimension. Further, it may not be a tubular portion provided along the entire peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251 but may be an arch-shaped portion along a part of the peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the convex portions 254A and the concave portions 254B extending in the front-rear direction are provided at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253. A reinforcing structure portion 254 made of the above is formed. Further, the convex portion 255A formed on the inner peripheral surface for forming the screw hole of the screw N1 in the first cylindrical body 252, and the inner portion for forming the mounting hole for the screw N1 in the second tubular body 253. The convex portion 255A formed on the peripheral surface and the concave portion 255B formed on the outer peripheral surface also function as the reinforcing structure portion 254. By forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 in this way, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion to improve the strength. do.

Further, a decorative portion is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion by the uneven portion and the plating process applied to the outer peripheral surface as described above. In the present embodiment, the decorative portion is provided by the uneven portion for reinforcement and the plating process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral surface is colored or a pattern is provided. May form a decorative portion.

The second transmissive body 260 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as a transparent acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin, and has a plate-like portion made of a rear transmissive plate 261 in which a hole 270 is formed and a non-transparent portion. It is composed of a frame body 262 formed in a frame shape by a light synthetic resin material. The rear transmission plate 261 is fixed to the back surface of the frame body 262 via an adhesive or the like so as to close the opening 262A of the frame body 262.

The first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 configured in this way have screws N2 attached from the front side to a plurality of mounting holes formed in the flange portion 256 of the first tubular body 252, and the frame body 262. By screwing into the screw hole formed in, it is integrated to form one window unit 51A. As shown in FIG. 3, the window unit 51A is attached to the back side of the opening / closing frame 50 at the opening position where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened so as to close the opening (not shown) of the opening / closing frame 50. ..

The window unit 51A is removable from the opening / closing frame 50 and can be replaced when the model is changed. Specifically, in a state where the locking pin projecting from the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 is inserted into the locking hole formed in the frame body 262, the locking hook provided in the frame body 262 is used as the locking pin. It is attached by locking.

When the opening / closing frame 50 is rotated from the open position to the closed position to close the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 with the window unit 51A attached to the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50, the rear transmission is performed as shown in FIG. The plate 261 is arranged substantially parallel to the board surface plate 200 with a predetermined gap in front of the board surface plate 200 of the game board 2, and a game ball can flow down between the board surface plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. A game area 10 is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the rear transmission plate 261 covers the entire game area 10 surrounded by the guide rails 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board surface plate 200 when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front (player side). The hole 270 is arranged so as to cover from the front, and the hole 270 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the board plate 200.

In the present embodiment, the game region 10 is a region where the game ball can flow down, that is, a region surrounded by the guide rails 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board plate 200, excluding the opening 2c, and the opening 2c. It includes a corresponding area, that is, an area in which the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y and various movable bodies described later are visibly provided by the player (areas shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 26). Further, since the center decorative frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c, it is restricted that the game ball flows into the opening 2c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hole portion 270 is different in shape and smaller in size from the opening 2c formed in the board plate 200, and is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c. The invention is not limited to this, and may be formed in substantially the same shape as the hole 270, or may be partially located outside the opening 2c.

Therefore, the game area 10 configured in this way is visible (perspective) from the player side in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 constituting the window portion 51. (See the window portion 51 shown in the mesh line area in FIG. 22 (A)). As shown in FIG. 27, the rear transmission plate 261 and the game board surface 200A are installed in an upright state so as to be parallel to each other, whereas the front transmission plate 251 gradually inclines backward from the upper side to the lower side. Therefore, since the rear transmissive plate 261 is arranged in a forward tilted posture, the lower separation dimension L2 than the upper separation dimension L1 with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 is shorter than the separation dimension L1. ing.

The first transmissive body 250 composed of the front transmissive plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion, is the post-transmissive body constituting the second transmissive body 260. It is formed in a convex shape protruding forward with respect to the plate 261, and in a state where the window unit 51A is attached to the opening / closing frame 50, the tubular portion composed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is formed. It is inserted into the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 from the back surface side and is provided so as to project forward.

Therefore, the rear transmission plate 261 forming the game area 10 together with the game board surface 200A is accommodated within the plate thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the opening / closing frame 50, while the tubular portion is provided so as to project forward with respect to the front surface of the opening / closing frame 50. As a result, the front transmission plate 251 can be arranged as far forward as possible from the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the front-rear dimension of the opening / closing frame 50. Thereby, a wide space portion S can be formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, the upper wall portions of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are formed so as to incline downward toward the front, and external light from the front upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted to the gaming area 10. Since it is difficult to enter, the front of the upper part of the game area 10 is hidden by the upper wall portion, but since the player's line of sight is located below the upper wall portion, it can be visually recognized by looking up.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a magnet is pressed against the front transmission plate 251 to cause a malfunction of the magnetic sensor to illegally generate a prize, or a game ball flowing down the game area 10 is magnetically driven. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as fraudulent guidance will be performed, but by lengthening the separation dimensions L1 and L2 between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the thickness of the rear transmission plate 261. Since the front transmission plate 251 can be kept away from the game area 10 as much as possible to attenuate the influence of the magnetic force of the magnet, fraudulent acts by the magnet can be suitably suppressed. Further, in a game machine equipped with a magnet sensor that detects illegal magnetism, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be performed by lengthening the separation dimension between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 within a range that cannot be detected by the magnet sensor. It is possible to suppress it suitably, and it is possible to reduce the number of magnet sensors arranged.

Next, a movable body unit having a first movable body 300, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, and a fourth movable body 600L, 600R will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 36. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit in the operation standby mode is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit of the first operation mode is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit of the second operation mode is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 31 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the operation standby mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 32 is a schematic view of the movable body unit of the first operation mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 33 is a schematic view of the movable body unit of the second operation mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 34 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the operation standby mode as viewed from the side. FIG. 35 is a schematic view of the movable body unit of the first operation mode as viewed from the side surface. FIG. 36 is a schematic view of the movable body unit of the second operation mode as viewed from the side surface.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various game-related effects such as variable display control of the effect symbol and advance notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Has been done.

The advance notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display of the effect symbol includes, for example, a big hit notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice suggesting whether or not to reach, and a stop symbol. Multiple notices executed at the start of fluctuation display or when reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to be announced and a latent notice to announce whether or not the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not it is latent). include.

In the present embodiment, the movable body effect by the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R described below, and these movable bodies and the speaker 8L, Various effects such as a combined effect using the 8R and the effect LED 9 and an operation effect executed on condition that the player operates an operation means such as the stick controller 31A can be executed as various notices.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the movable body unit is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y provided on the back side of the game board 2, and is provided between the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5X. , The base member 700 fixed to the back cover 70 supporting 5Y, and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the third movable body 300, which are movably provided with respect to the base member 700. It has 4 movable bodies 600L and 600R. The base member 700 is formed in a square frame shape by the upper side portion, the left side portion, the right side portion, and the lower side portion, and each upper side portion, left side portion, right side portion, and lower side portion are each of the display screens of the effect display device 5A. It is arranged along the sides so that the display screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y can be visually recognized through the central opening. This movable body unit can be changed into an operation standby mode, a first motion mode, and a second motion mode as described later.

The first movable body 300 has a slide plate 301 movably attached in the front-rear direction along a rail 701 extending diagonally downward from the upper side of the base member 700, and a rotation shaft 305 at the tip of the slide plate 301. A main body portion 302 rotatably supported by the main body portion, a first protruding portion 303 and a second protruding portion 304 attached to the main body portion 302 so as to be able to project and retract, a first drive mechanism 310, and a second drive mechanism. It is mainly composed of 320, a third drive mechanism 330, and a fourth drive mechanism 340 (see FIG. 2).

The first movable body 300 is a first standby position (see FIGS. 31 and 34), which is an origin position arranged on the upper side of the game board 2 by a first drive mechanism 310 including a first drive motor 311 and gears. And, it is possible to move along the rail 701 to the first effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 35) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. The first drive mechanism 310 includes a first standby position sensor and a first effect position sensor that detect the position of the first movable body 300.

Since the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is attached so as to be movable in the front-rear direction along the rail 701 of the base member 700, the first movable body 300 is attached to the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. You can accelerate and advance in the meantime. That is, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700 form the acceleration advance means. Further, in order to further enhance the acceleration property, a material and a shape having a lower sliding resistance between the slide plate 301 and the rail 701 may be used. Further, a lubricating oil or the like may be applied in order to further reduce the sliding resistance. Further, an acceleration support means (for example, a spring member or the like) (for example, a spring member or the like) which is not shown and is not omitted may be provided to support the acceleration of the first movable body 300. For example, the acceleration of the first movable body 300 can be supported by the spring force that tries to return to the natural length from the urging state in which the spring member is contracted to the natural length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

The main body 302 has a substantially hexahedron and is fixed to a rotation shaft 305 facing in the left-right direction. Hereinafter, in the main body portion 302, a surface facing the front in a normal state (operation standby mode) will be referred to as a surface A, and a surface facing upward will be described as a surface B.

The rotation shaft 305 is rotated by a second drive mechanism 320 including a second drive motor, gears, etc. (not shown), and the surface A of the main body 302 faces the front and the surface B faces upward. The motion standby state (see FIGS. 31 and 34), the first rotation state in which the surface A faces diagonally forward and upward and the surface B faces the rear side (see FIGS. 32 and 35), and the surface A diagonally forward. It is possible to switch between the second rotation state (see FIGS. 33 and 36) in which the surface B faces downward on the side and the surface B faces upward on the diagonally front side, and the rotation state of the main body portion 302. The second drive mechanism 320 includes a rotation standby position sensor, a first rotation position sensor, and a second rotation position sensor that detect the rotation state of the first movable body 300.

The first protruding portion 303 is a first retracted state (FIGS. 31, 33 and 34, FIG. 31) incorporated in the main body portion 302 by a third drive mechanism 330 including a third drive motor 331, a gear and a rack (not shown), and the like. 36) and the first protruding state (see FIGS. 32 and 35) protruding outward from the surface A of the main body 302 can be switched. In the first stored state, the entire first protruding portion 303 is housed in the main body portion 302 so as not to protrude to the outside from the main body portion 302. The third drive mechanism 330 includes a first protrusion position sensor and a first storage position sensor that detect the state of the first protrusion 303.

The second protruding portion 304 is partially incorporated in the main body portion 302 by a fourth drive mechanism 340 including a fourth drive motor 341 and a gear and a rack (not shown) (FIGS. 31, 32 and 34). , FIG. 35) and a second protruding state (see FIGS. 33 and 36) protruding outward from the surface B of the main body 302. In the second stored state, a part of the first protruding portion 303 protrudes outward from the surface B of the main body portion 302, but the back surface of the surface B in the rotation standby state or the first rotating state. Since it is placed on the side, it is not noticeable from the player (front side). The fourth drive mechanism 340 includes a second protrusion position sensor and a second storage position sensor that detect the state of the second protrusion 304.

The second movable body 400 is attached to the lower side portion of the base member 700, and is arranged on the lower side of the game board 2 by a fifth drive mechanism 410 including a fifth drive motor, a gear, a rack, and the like (not shown). 2 Moves up and down between the standby position (see FIGS. 31, 33, 34, and 36) and the second effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 35) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It is possible. The second movable body 400 is inclined so that the upper end thereof falls forward at the second effect position. The fifth drive mechanism 410 includes a second standby position sensor and a second effect position sensor that detect the position of the second movable body 400.

The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are attached to both left and right sides of the lower side portion of the base member 700, and are provided by the sixth drive mechanism 510L and 510R including the sixth drive motors 511L and 511R and a rotating arm and gear (not shown). , A third standby position (see FIGS. 31, 33, 34, and 36) arranged on the lower side of the game board 2 and a third effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 32) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It is possible to move up and down between (see 35) and. Specifically, the rotating arm is adapted to rotate about an axis (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, and each of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R is a second in the second standby position in the third standby position. It is arranged at a position separated from the left and right sides of the movable body 400, and is arranged at a position close to the left and right sides of the second movable body 400 at the second effect position in the third effect position. The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are inclined so that the upper ends of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R fall forward at the third effect position. The sixth drive mechanism 510L, 510R includes a third standby position sensor and a third effect position sensor that detect the positions of the third movable bodies 500L, 500R.

The fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are attached to both left and right sides of the upper side portion of the base member 700, and the seventh drive mechanism 610L and 610R including a seventh drive motor, gears, racks and the like (not shown) of the game board 2 It is possible to move up and down between the fourth standby position (see FIGS. 31 and 32) arranged on the upper side and the fourth effect position (see FIG. 33) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It has become. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move so as to be close to each other from the left and right sides of the upper side portion of the base member 700 toward the central portion, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are , At the 4th standby position, they are arranged at positions separated from the left and right sides of the 1st movable body 300 at the 1st standby position, and at the 4th effect position, at positions close to the left and right sides of the 1st movable body 300 at the 1st effect position. Be placed. The seventh drive mechanism 610L, 610R includes a fourth standby position sensor and a fourth effect position sensor that detect the positions of the fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first standby position (origin position), the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, and the third movable body 500L. , 500R are arranged in the third standby position, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged in the fourth standby position, and the first movable body 300 is in the rotation standby state and the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion. The unit 304 is in the first storage state and the second storage state. At this time, since each movable body is arranged on the peripheral side of the opening 2c of the game board 2, the display screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y can be visually recognized from the player (front side) (the display screen of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y). See FIG. 31). For example, as shown in FIG. 1, it can be said that the first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is a position where the first movable body 300 does not overlap with the effect display device 5A. The first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a position where the first movable body 300 overlaps a part of the effect display device 5A. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, only a part of the front surface side of the first movable body 300 in the first standby position (origin position) is slightly the first transparent body through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Although it has entered between the 250 and the second transmissive body 260, it may not enter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second effect position, and the third movable body 500L. The 500R is arranged at the third effect position, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged at the fourth standby position, the first movable body 300 is in the first rotating state, and the first protruding portion 303 is the first. It is in a protruding state, and the second protruding portion 304 is in a second stored state. At this time, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the first protruding portion 303 are arranged on the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y to form a predetermined shape. They coalesce by coming into contact with or close to each other to form an object (see FIG. 32). That is, the effect control CPU 120 can control the first movable body 300 to move the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R so as to be able to be combined after the first control is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in the second operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, and the third movable body 500L. The 500R is arranged at the third standby position, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged at the fourth effect position, the first movable body 300 is in the second rotating state, and the first protruding portion 303 is the first. It is in the stored state, and the second protruding portion 304 is in the second protruding state. At this time, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R and the second protruding portion 304 are arranged on the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, and a structure having a shape different from that of the first operating mode is formed. They coalesce by coming into contact with or close to each other to form a structure (see FIG. 33). That is, the effect control CPU 120 can control the first movable body 300 to move the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R so as to be able to be combined after the first control is performed.

Further, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first motion mode, or when the fourth movable body 600L, 600R is the first movable body 300 in the second motion mode. When combined with, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 (FIG. 35). , See FIG. 36).

Therefore, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are combined, the moving direction of the first movable body 300 in the first control, That is, since they are located at different positions in the front-rear direction, a sense of depth can be created.

Next, an example of operation control of the movable body unit by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of each movable body and the effect LED in the movable body effect.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 34, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, in the first movable body 300, a part of the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 is rearward at the first standby position. It is located on the front transmission plate 251 side, that is, on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 270 of the transmission plate 261 (particularly, see the solid line portion in FIGS. 31 and 34).

In the movable body effect according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 satisfies the start condition of the movable body effect (for example, an operation means during execution of the movable body effect (for example, an effect button or a stick). When the operation of the operating means is detected during the operation acceptance period of the controller 31A, etc., or when the operation valid period ends and the execution timing of the movable body is reached, etc.), the first movable body 300, the second movable body, etc. 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R is operated. The effect LED 9 performs a light emission effect according to the first light emission mode.

Specifically, the first movable body 300 moves diagonally downward from the first standby position to the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIGS. 31 and 34). As shown in the virtual line portions of FIGS. 31 and 34, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, the predetermined portion (front half) of the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 is rearward. The main body portion 302 is located on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 270 of the transmission plate 261, and the main body portion 302 is arranged on the front side of the first standby position. That is, in the effect control CPU 120, the predetermined portion (front half) of the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300 in the first standby position passes through the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the first control of moving to the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261. Further, the second movable body 400 moves toward the second effect position, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R move toward the third effect position.

When the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable body 500L, 500R move to a predetermined position, they are detected by the first effect position sensor, the second effect position sensor, and the third effect position sensor (not shown). The effect control CPU 120 causes the first movable body 300 to be in the first rotation state based on the detection of each movable body by the first effect position sensor, the second effect position sensor, and the third effect position sensor. The rotation shaft 305 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (first rotation, see arrow 2 in FIGS. 32 and 35). The effect control CPU 120 stops the first rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the first rotation position sensor. At this time, the front end side of the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R is tilted forward (see arrow 3 in FIGS. 32 and 35), and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third Movable bodies 500L and 500R are united. Even when rotating, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light according to the second light emitting mode, and the surface A of the main body portion 302 until the first protrusion 303 is detected by the first protrusion position sensor by the third drive mechanism 330. It is set to the first protruding state by projecting outward from the surface. As described above, in the first rotation state of the first movable body 300, the surface A of the main body portion 302 faces diagonally forward and upward, so that the first protruding portion 303 projects diagonally forward and upward. (See arrow 4 in FIGS. 32 and 35). That is, the first protruding portion 303 moves in a direction intersecting the moving direction (oblique downward direction) of the main body portion 302. That is, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the first control, the first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, is subjected to the first control. It is possible to execute the second control of moving in the direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction). By executing these first control and second control, the movable body unit changes to the first operation mode.

As described above, in the first movable body 300, after the main body portion 302 is moved diagonally forward and downward, the first protruding portion 303 is a space portion S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since it projects diagonally forward and upward, the moving operation of the first projecting portion 303 can be preferably shown without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. Further, even when the mode changes to the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the front transmission plate 251 does not come into contact with the front transmission plate 251.

Further, in the first operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body portion 302 is located in the space portion S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state. As shown in FIG. 32, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first protruding portion 303 moves so as to spread around the main body portion 302, that is, by projecting, a part of the main body portion 302 expands. Since the first movable body 300 seems to be expanded, it is possible to give an impact to the player.

Further, even after the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the first protruding portion 303 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it does not protrude to the outside of the area to be played, that is, it does not protrude to the game area 10 side of the game ball, the first protruding portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the game ball.

Further, in the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the first protruding portion 303 form a structure having a predetermined shape. do. Specifically, the second movable body 400 is arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the lower part of the first movable body 300, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are in contact with or adjacent to the left and right sides of the first movable body 300. By arranging them so as to be close to each other, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R serve as supporting means for the first movable body 300 and support each other, so that the protruding operation of the first protruding portion 303 is performed. And the shaking of the first movable body 300 after the protruding operation is suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

Further, most of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are arranged on the game area 10 side (back side) of the rear transmission plate 261 when combined with the first movable body 300. , It is possible to give a sense of depth to the structure constructed by coalescing.

Further, since the brightness of the second light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 is lower than that of the first light emitting mode, when the movable body unit is in the first operation mode (during the second control), the light of the effect LED 9 is used. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the movable body.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first protrusion 303 until it is detected by the first storage position sensor based on the elapse of the state of the first operation mode of the movable body unit. 1 The stored state is set, and the second movable body 400 is moved to the second standby position and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are moved to the third standby position until they are detected by the second standby position sensor and the third standby position sensor. (See arrow 5 in FIGS. 33 and 36). Next, after the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R reach positions that do not interfere with the rotational movement of the first movable body 300, the first movable body 300 is rotated so as to be in the second rotating state. The moving shaft 305 is rotated clockwise in the right side view (second rotation, see arrows 6 in FIGS. 33 and 36), and the effect LED 9 is made to emit light in the third light emitting mode. The effect control CPU 120 stops the second rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the second rotation position sensor.

Then, the second projecting portion 304 is projected until it is detected by the second projecting position sensor to bring it into the second projecting state (see arrows 7 in FIGS. 33 and 36), and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are described. It is moved toward the fourth effect position until it is detected by the fourth effect position sensor (see arrow 7 in FIGS. 33 and 36). That is, after executing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 uses the second protruding portion 304, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, in the first control. It is possible to execute the second control of moving in the direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction). By executing these first control and second control, the movable body unit changes to the second operation mode. At this time, the effect LED 9 is made to emit light according to the fourth light emitting mode.

Further, in the second operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body portion 302 is located in the space portion S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the second protruding portion 304 is changed to the second protruding state. As shown in FIG. 33, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second protruding portion 304 moves so as to spread around the main body portion 302, that is, by projecting, a part of the main body portion 302 expands. Since the first movable body 300 seems to be expanded, it is possible to give an impact to the player.

Further, even after the second protruding portion 304 is changed to the second protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the second protruding portion 304 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it does not project out of the region where the pachinko ball is to flow, that is, it does not protrude into the flowing region of the pachinko ball, the first projecting portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the pachinko ball.

In the second operating mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R and the second protruding portion 304 are united so as to form a structure having a shape different from that of the first operating mode. do. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged so as to be in contact with or close to each other on the left and right sides of the first movable body 300, so that the fourth movable body 600L and 600R are supporting means of the first movable body 300. Therefore, the protruding motion of the second protruding portion 304 and the shaking of the first movable body 300 after the protruding motion are suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

Further, most of the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the game area 10 side (rear side) of the rear transmission plate 261 when combined with the first movable body 300, and thus are configured to be combined. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the structure (see FIG. 30).

Further, since the brightness of the fourth light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 is lower than that of the first light emitting mode and the third light emitting mode, the movable body unit is used for the effect when the movable body unit is in the second operation mode (during the second control). The light of the LED 9 can suppress the deterioration of the visibility of each movable body.

When the effect operation by each movable body is completed after the second operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the second protrusion 304 until it is detected by the second storage position sensor. The first movable body 300 is set to the first standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are set to the fourth standby position until they are detected by the first standby position sensor and the fourth standby position sensor. Move toward (storage operation). At this time, the effect LED 9 is made to emit light according to the fifth light emitting mode. When the first movable body 300 moves to the first standby position and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move to the fourth standby position, the movable body effect by the movable body unit is completed.

It should be noted that the first light emitting mode to the fifth light emitting mode by the effect LED 9 may be different depending on various operation modes of the movable body. The light emitting mode includes, for example, a light emitting color, brightness, lighting or blinking, blinking speed, and the like.

Next, the effect of the effect of the effect LED 9 and the movable LED 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR on the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 38. 38A and 38B are schematic views of the light emitting modes of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from the side, and FIG. 38 is a schematic view of the light emitting modes of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from above. ..

As shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), the effect LED 9 arranged around the first transmissive body 250 on the front surface of the opening / closing frame 50 irradiates light toward the first transmissive body 250. Since the outer peripheral surface of the first transmissive body 250 (first tubular body 252) is plated, the light from the effect LED 9 is reflected and does not enter the first transmissive body 250. ing. Further, the ambient external light R other than the light from the effect LED 9 (for example, the light such as the indoor light of the game store or the light from the adjacent game machine) should not enter the first transmitter 250 in the same manner. It has become.

That is, it is possible to prevent the visibility of each movable body and the game area 10 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR from affecting the light emission effect. Further, by irradiating the periphery of the first transmissive body 250, it is possible to make it stand out so as to surround the periphery of each movable body, and not only the player playing the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also the surroundings. You can appeal the production.

Further, the movable body LEDs include a movable body LED 350A attached to the main body portion 302 facing the front side (player side), a movable body LED 350B attached to the second protruding portion 304, and movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR facing the side surface side. The light is directed to the back side (game area 10 side) and consists of movable LEDs 350DL and 350DR (light emitting means). The light to the front side by the movable body LEDs 350A and 350B is irradiated to the front side through the front transmission plate 251 and the light to the back side by the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR is the game area 10 (the game ball flowing down the game area 10). It is designed to irradiate the winning opening, guidance passage, etc.). The light to the side surface side of the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR is emitted toward the first transmissive body 250, but the inner peripheral surface of the first transmissive body 250 (second tubular body 253) is plated. Since the light is applied, the light of the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR is reflected to the front side. That is, it is possible to collect light on the front side to enhance the effect of the effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission of the effect LED 9 from being affected.

Next, an example of the display device effect in the effect display devices 5X and 5Y will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 is a schematic view showing a standby state showing a normal time of the effect display device, FIG. 39 is a schematic view showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and FIG. 39 is a second diagram of the effect display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operating state.

As shown in FIG. 39 (A), in the normal state of the effect display device, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are in a standby state in which the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A. In this standby state, the standby state is arranged in a slightly inclined state so that the display unit faces the center side.

Above and below the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, rail members (guidance means) (not shown) that guide the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged. This rail member is composed of a portion extending in the front-rear direction at a position on the front side of the effect display device 5A and a portion extending in a direction away from both ends of the front-rear portion to the left and right. Is rotatably attached to the rail member about a rotation axis in the vertical direction. As described above, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are movably and rotatably provided by the display device drive mechanism 900 including a rail member, a drive motor, and the like (not shown).

When the predetermined start condition of the display device effect is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y closer to the position on the front side of the effect display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 39 (B). After that, the rear transmission plate 261 is moved from the position on the back surface side to the position on the front surface side via the hole portion 270, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the first operating state. That is, the effect control CPU 120 passes through the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in the standby state at the position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261, and the predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y via the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the third control of moving the rear transmission plate 261 to the front transmission plate 251 until it is located closer to the front transmission plate 251.

Since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the position on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 while the display unit is slightly tilted so as to face the center side, the display unit is easy for the player to see. The movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be preferably shown while maintaining the state.

When the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the position on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261, the effect control CPU 120 separates the effect display devices 5X and 5Y from each other as shown in FIG. 39 (C). While moving in the direction, a rotation motor (not shown) rotates the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y so as to face the outside in the left-right direction. That is, after executing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fourth control of moving in the direction (left-right direction) intersecting the moving direction (front-back direction) in the third control. By executing these the third control and the fourth control, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y change to the second operation state.

Further, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y face outward in the left-right direction in the second operating state, the display contents of the display unit can be visually recognized by other than the player. The rail member that guides the movement of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y is the effect display device 5X, when changing from the standby state to the first operating state, or when changing from the first operating state to the second operating state. Since it functions as a contact prevention means for preventing contact between the 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the effect display device 5X, 5Y or the rear transmission plate 261 from being damaged.

Next, the relationship between the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a schematic view showing a state in which the opening / closing frame is opened in the second operation mode of the movable body unit.

As shown in FIG. 40, the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 is formed to be larger than the first movable body 300. More specifically, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed, the hole portion 270 also rotates around the hinge portion (rotating shaft in the vertical direction) of the opening / closing frame 50. The first movable body 300 in the second operating mode of the movable body unit is the most protruding movable body in each operating mode of the movable body unit, and is a front portion of the first movable body 300 (closed state of the opening / closing frame 50). The portion arranged on the front transmission plate 251 side of the hole portion 270) is arranged in the rotation region Z of the hole portion 270.

Therefore, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed, the rear transmission plate 261 does not come into contact with the first movable body 300. According to this, for example, when an operation error or the like occurs during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, and it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance. Even if there is, since the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 from being damaged.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. When the player rotates the hitting operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area 10. Based on the fact that the game ball that has flowed down the game area 10 has passed through the passage gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. After the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, if the predetermined time that is the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses and the normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. If a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol", and the open control for retracting the movable plate of the normal variable winning ball device 6B from the game area 10 is performed. It is performed, and when a predetermined time elapses, a normal opening control is performed to return to the closed position protruding to the game area 10. In addition, when the normal figure game cannot be started, such as during the following open control in which another normal figure game is already executed, the execution of the normal figure game is suspended up to four or the like. The pending Fuzu game will start when it becomes available.

Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, after the first start condition is satisfied due to the game ball winning the first start winning opening. , The special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A is started. In addition, after the second start condition is satisfied due to the game ball winning the second start winning opening, for example, the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. Based on this, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B is started. In addition, when the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already executed or when the game is controlled to the big hit game state described later, four or the like are used. The execution of the special figure game is suspended up to the upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when the start condition is satisfied.

In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, a special symbol such as "3" or "7") is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol (loss) different from the jackpot symbol is obtained. If a symbol (for example, a special figure such as "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. The jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. When the variable display result in the special figure game is "missing", it is not controlled to the jackpot game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. The big prize opening will be open until the occurrence of. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, so that the special variable winning ball device can be used. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "16") (the big winning opening is closed during the period other than the round game).

In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5A, the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the start of the special figure game. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the end of the variable display, the variable display state of the effect symbol may be in a predetermined reach state. The reach state refers to an effect symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. It is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination.

In the embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display. As the reach effect, normal reach, super reach A (developed from normal reach), and super reach B (developed from normal reach), which have different production modes, are prepared. In the embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach (normal reach that does not develop into super reach). The jackpot expectation degree is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit", and here, the ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes "big hit".

When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a predetermined big hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. The confirmed effect symbol is derived and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same production symbol (for example, "7" at the time of probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot) on a predetermined effective line in the production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". At that time, "6" etc.) are all displayed as a stop. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (B) described later, the “non-probability change” includes a non-probability change jackpot in which a promotion effect (failure) is executed during the jackpot and a non-probability change jackpot in which the promotion effect itself is not executed. There are two types of "probability change": the probabilistic jackpot in which the promotion effect (success) is executed during the jackpot, and the probabilistic jackpot in which the promotion effect itself is not executed. The promotion effect is a probabilistic promotion effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds) during the jackpot and indicates that the promotion to the probabilistic jackpot was successful or unsuccessful. When the jackpot type is "non-probability change (probability of promotion effect)", the same effect symbols "6" are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change promotion effect (failure) is executed in the 7 rounds during the jackpot. When the jackpot type is "probability change (successful promotion effect)", the same effect symbols "6" are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change promotion effect (success) is executed in the 7 rounds during the jackpot. The probabilistic promotion effect may be executed in a round other than the 7 rounds, a plurality of rounds, a fanfare effect, an ending effect, or the like. Further, the promotion effect may be a round promotion effect for notifying the continuation of the round.

When the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the effect symbol does not become the reach mode, and the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol. Alternatively, after the variable display mode of the effect symbol becomes the reach mode, the final effect symbol of a predetermined reach combination (reach loss combination) that is not a big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol.

As a definite special symbol in the special figure game, of the multiple types of jackpot combinations, the definite effect symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as "non-probability variable jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "non-probable variable jackpot". If it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit game state, and after the end, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, the so-called electric chew support is carried out in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased. Therefore, the state in which the time reduction control is performed (time reduction state) is an advantageous gaming state for the player as compared with the normal state. In the time reduction control, either of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a definite special symbol in the special figure game, of the multiple types of jackpot combinations, the definite effect symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination (also referred to as "probability variation jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "probability variation jackpot". If it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit game state, and after the end, the probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing this probability variation control, the probability that the variation display result becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the state in which the probability change control is performed (probability change state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the probabilistic control, when the condition that the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the control is made to the big hit game state again is satisfied, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100, which is the same as the time reduction number) after the end of the big hit game state is satisfied. When the special figure game of (times) is executed, it is decided that "there is a probability change fall" to end the probability change control in the probability change fall lottery that is executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state ends. When, etc., it should end.

When the time reduction control is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal figure game (normal figure fluctuation time) is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol in each normal figure game is "normal figure". The control to improve the probability of "hit" compared to the normal state, and the movement control time to control the movement of the movable plate in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "hit" is normal. There is a possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the state and control to increase the number of movements compared to the normal state. Controls (electric chew support control, high open control) that are advantageous to the player are performed by increasing the value. This makes it easier to establish the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure, and the special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is "big hit" next. The time until becomes is shortened.

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic change state, and the variable display result in the normal drawing game is, for example, "normal drawing". The probability of "hit" and the probability of the variable display result in the special figure game becoming "big hit" are the initial setting states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return process is performed after the power is turned on. It is a state that is controlled in the same way as (when) is not executed.

The time saving state is also called "high base", the gaming state that is not the time saving state is called "low base" and "non-time saving state", and the probabilistic state is also called "high accuracy". A gaming state that is not a probabilistic state is also called "low probability" or "non-probability change". The game state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high probability high base". The game state when the game is in the probable change state but not in the time saving state is also called "high probability low base". The game state when the time is shortened although it is not in the probable change state is also called "low probability high base". The normal state is also called "low accuracy low base".

Next, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like. In each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be performed.

(Main operation of main board 11)
On the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from the CTC (counter / timer circuit) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds), that is, at the interrupt request signal supply interval. It is executed every predetermined time (2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt processing, the CPU 103 executes a switch process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process process, a command control process, and the like, and the game control timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. By doing so, control of the game and the like are realized.

In the switch processing, each switch determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not the game ball has entered or passed) is determined for each switch. The result of this determination is used in the special symbol process process and the normal symbol process process.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. The special symbol process process is a process for realizing the hold and execution of the special symbol game, the jackpot game state, and the like based on the determination result in the switch process. The normal symbol process processing realizes the hold and execution of the normal figure game, the open state of the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening), etc. at the time of hitting the normal figure, based on the judgment result in the switch processing. It is a process to do. The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command set for transmission in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Production control command set to be transmitted in the special symbol process process)
Next, an effect control command that is set to be transmitted in the special symbol process process and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in the command control process will be described. FIG. 41 (A) shows an example of a main effect control command. The following "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

Fluctuation pattern designation command 81XX (H), display result designation command 8CXX (H), symbol confirmation designation command 8F00 (H), hit start designation command A000 (H), hit end designation command A300 (H), first start winning designation A command B100 (H), a second start prize designation command B200 (H), and a large prize opening prize designation command B300 (H) are prepared in advance. "XX" is EXT data. A numerical value corresponding to the variable display result is set in "XX" of the display result specification command 8CXX (H) (for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), "00" for "loss" and "non-probability change". "01" for "big hit", "02" for "non-probable big hit (probable change production failure)", "03" for "probable change big hit", "04" for "probable change big hit (probable change production success)", etc.).

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. Each flag, each counter, and each timer described below are provided in the RAM 102. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process (S101). For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the first start port switch 22A is on (whether it is determined to be on by the switch process, and the same applies to the other switches). When it is on, it is determined whether the first special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it has not reached the upper limit number, it is assumed that the first start winning prize has occurred and the random number circuit. From 104 or the game random number value updated by the game random number update process, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (variable display result of the special game), the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination The random number value MR3 for use is extracted, and the extracted numerical value is held in the first special figure holding storage unit of the RAM 102 as the first holding data. It is determined whether the second start port switch 22B is on. When it is on, it is determined whether the second special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit number (for example, 4), and when it has not reached the upper limit number, it is assumed that the second start winning prize has occurred. Similarly, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted, and the extracted numerical values are held in the second special figure holding storage unit of the RAM 102 as the second holding data. The first hold data and the second hold data are held in the order of starting winning. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number may be specified by the number of the first reserved data and the second reserved data, or by a counter that counts each stored number (hereinafter, the same applies). In the start winning judgment process, when the first start winning is given, the transmission setting of the first starting winning designation command and the addition designation command of the first special figure reserved memory is performed, and when the second starting winning is given. , The transmission setting of the second start prize designation command and the addition designation command of the second special figure reserved storage number is performed.

After executing S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag. The following time saving flag is a flag that is turned on in the time saving state, and the probability change flag is a flag that is turned on in the probability change state.

The special symbol normal processing of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". For example, when the second special figure hold storage number is not "0", the CPU 103 performs a process for executing the second special figure game, updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1", and performs this process. finish. When the second special figure holding memory number is "0" and the first special figure holding storage number is not "0", the process for executing the first special figure game is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to "1". To end this process. When both are "0", this process is terminated.

In the process for executing the second special figure game, the oldest second hold data among the second hold data (random values MR1 to MR3) held in the second special figure hold storage unit is held in the second special figure hold. Read from the storage unit to a predetermined buffer of RAM 102. The read second hold data is deleted from the second special figure hold storage unit. Then, among the second reserved data read into the predetermined buffer, the second special figure to be executed this time is based on the random number value MR1 and the jackpot determination table (stored in ROM 101; hereinafter the same applies to the determination table). Determine the variable display result (“big hit” or “miss”) of the game. The determination rate of "big hit" is higher in the probabilistic state (when the probabilistic flag is on) than in the non-probable change state (when the probabilistic flag is off). When "big hit" is determined, the big hit type ("probable variation" or "non-probable variation") is determined based on the random number value MR2 and the jackpot type determination table. In the embodiment, one of "non-probability change", "non-probability change (probability of promotion production)", "probability change", and "probability change (success of promotion production)" is determined. The above-mentioned decision result and information to execute the second special figure game are held in the RAM 102 and are appropriately referred to (the same applies to other decisions and the like).

In the process for executing the first special figure game, the same process as the process for executing the second special figure game is performed, the first reserved data is read into a predetermined buffer, and the first special figure game is variable. Determine the display result (including determining the jackpot type).

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. For example, the CPU 103 determines (selects) a fluctuation pattern and sets the execution start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game. The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the variable display (special figure variation time) and the variable display pattern of the effect symbol.

In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, there are PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4 as the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. There are B3-2 to PB3-4 as a jackpot fluctuation pattern. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for shortening the time (with shortening) in which the special figure fluctuation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than the normal (PA1-1). PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify the execution of normal reach (no development to super reach), PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify the execution of super reach A (evolve from normal reach), and PA3 -4, PB3-4 specify the execution of Super Reach B (developed from normal reach).

When the variable display result of this time is "big hit", the CPU 103 has PB3-2 to PB3-2 based on the random number value MR3 of the first and second reserved data read into the predetermined buffer and the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit. One of PB3-4 is determined as the fluctuation pattern of this time. When the variable display result is "missing" and in the non-time saving state (when the time saving flag is off), PA1-1 and PA3 are based on the random number value MR3 and the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first loss. Any one of -2 to PA3-4 is determined as the fluctuation pattern of this time. When the variable display result is "missing" and the time saving state (when the time saving flag is on), PA2-1 and PA3- based on the random number value MR3 and the fluctuation pattern determination table for the second loss. Any of 2 to PA3-4 is determined as the fluctuation pattern of this time. The rate of determination of the fluctuation pattern is higher in the order of PA1-1 or PA2-1> PA3-2> PA3-3> PA3-4 at the time of loss. At the time of big hit, it is higher in the order of PB3-4> PB3-3> PB3-2. Therefore, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach.

After determining the variation pattern, for example, the drive signal is started to be supplied to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, and the execution of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is started. Display result specification command, 1st or 2nd special figure hold storage subtraction specification command, variation pattern specification command to specify the above decision result and the current game state (can be specified by the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag). Set the transmission setting of, set the value of the special figure process flag to "2", and then end this process.

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". For example, in the CPU 103, the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game (may be measured by a timer or the like. The same applies to other elapsed times) has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern. (Whether it is the derivation timing of the variable display result) is determined, and if it is not reached, the drive signal for executing the first special figure game or the second special figure game is set to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol. This process ends after the process of supplying to the display 4B and changing the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation time is reached, a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, and the symbol of the current variable display result (in the case of "missing", "" -”,“ 7 ”for“ probability variation jackpot ”,“ 3 ”for non-probability variation jackpot”, etc. Update the value of to "3". Execution of the special figure game is realized by repeatedly executing S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

The special symbol stop processing of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". For example, when the variable display result of this time is "big hit", the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the probability change flag to off. After that, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command is set, the special figure process flag is updated to "4", and this process is terminated. When the time saving state is "missing", it is determined whether the variable display of a predetermined number of times that can be executed in the time saving state has been executed (for example, it may be counted by a counter or the like), and the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed. If so, the time saving flag is reset to off, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "0", and this process is terminated. Even if the variable display of a predetermined number of times has not been executed due to "loss" and the time is not shortened, this process is terminated by setting the value of the special figure process flag to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time since the transmission setting of the hit start designation command has reached the preset fanfare waiting time (waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit game state). If it has not been reached, the jackpot opening preprocessing is terminated. When the fanfare waiting time is reached, in order to start the round game, processing such as opening the large winning opening (supplying a solenoid drive signal) is performed, and the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating S114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

The process of opening the jackpot in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. After the number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "9") (it may be counted by a counter or the like), or after the round game is started ( When the elapsed time (after opening the large winning opening) reaches the upper limit period of the round game (for example, 29 seconds) and it is time to end the round game, the large winning opening is returned to the closed state. A process of ending the round game (a process of turning off the solenoid 82) and the like are performed. At this time, when the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted by a counter or the like), the setting to send the hit end designation command is set, and the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7" and this process ends. If it is not the last round game, the special figure process flag is updated to "6" and this process is terminated. If it is not the timing to end the round game at present, this process is terminated as it is (a process of maintaining the large winning opening in an open state may be performed). By repeating S115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening to the closed state, and finally the large winning opening is closed.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the big winning opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (interval period of the round game), and if not. The closed state is maintained, and this process is completed. When the predetermined closing time is reached, in order to start the round game, a process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and this process is terminated.

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the big winning opening is opened in S114.

The jackpot end processing of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". For example, the elapsed time from the end of the last round game (after closing the big winning opening) is the predetermined ending waiting time (waiting time from the start to the end of the ending in the big hit game state). It is determined whether or not it has been reached, and if it has not been reached, this process is terminated. When the ending waiting time is reached, the ending ends, so when the jackpot type this time is "probability change", turn on the time saving flag and probability change flag, and when "non-probability change", turn on the time saving flag and change the probability. Leave the flag off. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and this process is terminated.

(Operation of production control board 12)
FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process. In the main process, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining an effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms), and the like is performed (S51). After that, the process shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt flag is set in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the flag is cleared (S53) and the following process is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the receive command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed, and settings and controls corresponding to the analysis result are performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display and operation control of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are executed. .. Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number (S56).

Next, when an abnormality or an error has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification control process for executing an abnormality notification (S57), and then shifts to S52. As shown in FIG. 45B, in the notification control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a door opening detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is on (S61). For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11. The main board 11 transmits to the effect control board 12 a door opening designation command indicating that the opening / closing frame 50 has been opened, based on the detection of the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. Therefore, when the door opening designation command from the main board 11 is received, it can be determined that the door opening detection switch is on.

If the door open detection switch is on (S61; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first movable body 300 is in operation (S62). For example, if the first movable body 300 is at the origin position, it is determined that it is not in operation, and if it is not at the origin position, it is determined that it is in operation. If the first movable body 300 is in operation (S62; Yes), the door opening notification (first opening notification) when the movable body is operating is executed (S63). On the other hand, if the first movable body 300 is not in operation (S62; No), the door opening notification (second opening notification) in the normal state is executed (S65). The door opening notification during the operation of the movable body is different from the door opening notification during the normal operation. For example, the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body has a mode in which the notification sound is louder than the door opening notification during the normal operation, or the notification image and the notification light emission are conspicuous. In addition, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating displays a notification image indicating that the moving object is in operation (for example, "moving object is operating!" Or "be careful of the moving moving object!". The contents may be output by voice, etc.), and the door opening notification at normal times may not have that effect.

In this way, with the first opening notification, it is possible to notify that the opening / closing frame 50 is being opened during the operation of the first movable body 300, and the opening / closing frame 50 is opened while considering the operating first movable body 300. Can be dealt with. Further, in the case of the second opening notification, it is possible to notify that the opening / closing frame 50 is open when the first movable body 300 is not operating, and the opening / closing frame 50 can be dealt with without worrying about the first movable body 300. can do. Therefore, when the opening / closing frame 50 is notified of opening, appropriate measures can be taken according to the presence / absence of operation of the first movable body 300. It should be noted that the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body and the door opening notification during the normal operation may be the same notification without distinction.

After S63, the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted (S64). For example, the operation of the first movable body 300 is stopped. If the opening / closing frame 50 is detected during the operation of the first movable body 300, the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted, so that damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260 can be prevented. ..

As an example of limiting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S64), control may be performed to move the first movable body 300 to the standby position. According to this, for example, when the first control or the second control is being executed in the movable body effect, an operation abnormality of the first movable body 300 occurs and the first movable body 300 is placed in the first effect position or the like. Even if it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance due to the fact that the opening / closing frame 50 becomes stuck or the ball is clogged in the game area 10, the first opening / closing frame 50 is opened. Since the movable body 300 retracts toward a position where it does not come into contact with the rear transmission plate 261 (for example, a standby position or the like), it is possible to prevent the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 from being damaged.

Further, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened, even if the game ball that has been stagnant in a beaded state due to ball clogging falls, it is moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 by the first control, that is, to the front side of the game area 10. By retracting the moving first movable body 300 to the standby position side, it is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from colliding with the first movable body 300, so that the first movable body 300 collides with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged or bouncing due to a collision with the first movable body 300 and entering the back surface side of the board surface plate 200 through the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200.

On the other hand, when the door open detection switch is not on (S61; No), this process ends after S64 or after S65.

(Command analysis processing)
In the command analysis process, the reception command (effect control command received by the effect control board 12) stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed (for example, the MODE data is confirmed), and which effect control is the received command. It identifies whether it is a command and performs processing according to the specified effect control command.

FIG. 44 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis by the command analysis process and the processing content performed in the command analysis process corresponding to the effect control command. Each flag and each storage area in the figure are provided in the RAM 122. About a flag "Set" means to turn on the flag. The state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area may be reset or deleted at an appropriate timing. When the command to specify the addition of the number of special figure hold storage or the command to specify the subtraction of the special figure hold storage number is received, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5A is received accordingly. You may increase or decrease the number of images.

(Production control process processing)
The effect control CPU 120 performs start setting (start setting of effect) for starting execution of various effects in the effect control process process, effect operation control for executing the effect set to start, and the like. Each flag, each timer, each counter and the like described below are provided in the RAM 122.

The effect start setting includes, for example, setting an effect control pattern in the RAM 122 as a pattern to be used, and setting an initial value in the process timer according to the effect control pattern set above. After setting the initial value, the timer value of the process timer is subtracted at a predetermined timing (at the start of the effect control process process, at the time of the effect operation control described later, etc.) every time a timer interrupt occurs. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects (including variable display of effect symbols), and is associated with a process timer determination value to be compared with the timer value of the process timer and the determination value. It is composed of process data including the effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lighting control data, etc.) and the end code. The data constituting the effect control pattern is stored in the ROM 121.

The effect operation control is a control for executing the effect based on the effect control pattern set in the effect start setting. Specifically, among the effect control execution data corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the current timer value of the process timer, the display control command according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 to display the effect. The effect of displaying an image on the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, transmitting a drive control command according to the drive control data to the display device drive mechanism 900 to drive the effect display device 5X, 5Y, or following the voice control data. The sound signal is transmitted to the voice control board 13 to output the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination signal according to the lighting control data is transmitted to the LED control board 14 to turn on / off the effect LED 9. And control to execute the production. By repeatedly performing the effect operation control each time a timer interrupt occurs, various effects can be executed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 executes any of S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

Next, the processes of S170 to S175 will be described. The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command or the like from the main board 11 has been received. The determination may be made, for example, by whether or not the command is stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. When the command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and this process ends. If the command has not been received, this process ends as it is.

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like as a final effect symbol as a variable display result of the effect symbol (S321). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is finally stopped based on variable display contents such as a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. Determine the design. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". be.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the effect symbol does not change to the reach state, the confirmed effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state, the final effect symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes "loss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 stops different (mismatched) effect symbols in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the confirmed effect symbols, the left confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for right-determined symbol determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. For example, among the confirmed effect symbols, the right confirmed effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed effect symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. As a result, among the finalized effect symbols, the medium confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) effect symbol in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right confirmed symbols updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effects, and the like, and uses the left and right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to the finalized effect symbols, the effect symbols having the same stop display in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right" on the screen of the effect display device 5A can be displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. As a result, among the confirmed effect symbols, the middle confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. For example, when the definite effect symbol is a big hit combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle definite effect symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left definite effect symbol and the right definite effect symbol, an arbitrary value (for example, "" By adding or subtracting 1)) to the symbol number of the medium-determined effect symbol, the confirmed effect symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle confirmed effect symbol, the difference (symbol difference) between the left confirmed effect symbol and the right confirmed effect symbol may be determined, and the middle confirmed effect symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The same (matching) effect symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A, Determines the effect symbols having the same symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probable change (big hit)", and whether or not the big hit medium promotion effect is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the effect symbol (shown effect symbol) and the probabilistic symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the definite effect symbol. In the big hit middle promotion effect, the combination of the effect symbols (non-probable change big hit combination) that reminds the big hit but does not remind the probable change state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect display device 5A, and then the big hit game state or the big hit game state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", a fixed effect symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite effect symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the big hit middle promotion effect even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the final effect symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by preventing the big hit middle promotion effect from being executed even though the probabilistic patterns are aligned and displayed as the final effect symbols.

After the process of S321, the change effect setting process for setting the execution of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed. You may do so.

After the processing of S322, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses the effect control pattern 120. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control pattern) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and uses the pattern. Set as.

After the process of S323, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body effect setting process (S323A) for operating the movable body in the case of the reach effect of, for example, Super Reach A.

In the movable body effect setting process shown in FIG. 48 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect pattern is the variation pattern of the super reach A based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A is (S501; Yes), the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and also extracts the extracted numerical data and the table for determining the movable body effect shown in FIG. 48 (B). It is used to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, its operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 48 (B), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, “without execution” is 15%, and “with execution” is “operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 29). ) ”Is determined with a 55% probability, and“ with execution ”has a 30% probability of“ motion pattern PTA-2 (second motion mode shown in FIG. 30 after becoming the first motion mode shown in FIG. 29) ”. Is determined by. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is determined with a probability of 10%, and with "execution", "operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation form)" is determined with a probability of 20%. Then, with "execution", the "operation pattern PTA-2 (second operation mode after the first operation mode)" is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the movable body effect than in the case of loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the movable body effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body effect of "motion pattern PTA-2 (second motion mode after the first motion mode)" is higher than that in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. It is easy to execute, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 operates in the second motion mode shown in FIG. 30 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 29)" is executed, the first movable body 300 is the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 29. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that operates in a motion form, and the interest of the game is improved. Here, the operation pattern PTA-2 is assumed to perform the second operation mode after becoming the first operation mode, but the operation pattern PTA-2 is not limited to this. For example, the operation pattern PTA-2 may perform only the second operation mode shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A but also in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach may include a fluctuation pattern having a pseudo-continuous fluctuation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After the processing of S502 shown in FIG. 48 (A), it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504). After the processing of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTA-1 or PTA-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not the super reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 47, following the process of S323A, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by, for example, the variation pattern designation command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (S324). Then, a setting for starting the fluctuation of the effect symbol or the like is made on the screen of the effect display device 5A (S325). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Therefore, the variation of the effect symbols may be started in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the display area of the effect display device 5A.

After the processing of S325, the first hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D, the second hold display of the second hold storage display area 5U, and the like are updated in response to the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. (S326). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), the display portion (display portion at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted (digested) in the first hold storage display area 5D. , The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), the display portion (display portion at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the second hold storage display area 5U. At the same time, the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 46, the variable display process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, for example, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (S341). .. As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. , It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed. When the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). ). The hold display change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined by the process of S323 shown in FIG. 47. In the case of the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the LED control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect LED 9 is turned on, blinking or extinguished. Alternatively, by combining some or all of these, it is sufficient that the hold display change effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device.

When it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No), or after the processing of S343, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (S346). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in an effect control pattern determined according to a fluctuation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that the reach effect period is reached (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (S347). After the processing of S347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the movable body effect flag is on (S347A). When the movable body effect flag is on (S347A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation of the stick controller 31A or the like is valid during the operation valid period (S347B). When the operation is valid (S347B; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stick controller 31A has been operated (S347C). When the stick controller 31A is operated (S347C; Yes), the operation flag is set to the ON state (S347D). Movable when S347B determines that the operation is not valid (S347B; No), when S347C determines that the stick controller 31A is not operated (S347C; No), or after processing S347D. It is determined whether or not it is the body production period (S347E). In the case of the movable body effect period (S347E; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S347F). When the operation flag is on (S347F; Yes), the movable body effect execution process is performed (S347G). If the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), an alternative effect execution process is performed instead of the movable body effect (S347H). Even when the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), the movable body effect execution process may be performed (S347G).

When it is determined in S347A that the movable body effect flag is not on (S347A; No), when it is determined in S347E that it is not the movable body effect period (S347E; No), or after the processing of S347G. After the processing of S347H, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect during variable display including a variable display operation of the effect symbol, based on, for example, a setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Control is performed to execute (S348).

When the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (S349; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the process is waited for. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), the display result in the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed effect symbol) to be displayed (S350). Further, in the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. Then, after the processing of S350, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (S351). After the processing of S351, the movable body effect flag and the operation flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (S352), the variable display effect process is terminated.

The special figure hit waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current elapsed time (measured by a predetermined timer) after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed has reached the preset hit start designation command reception waiting time. However, if the hit start designation command is received when the hit start designation command is received (when the hit start designation command reception flag is on), the jackpot middle production (from the start of the fanfare executed during the jackpot game state to before the ending) Set the start of the effect) (set the effect control pattern, etc.). After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", and this process is terminated. If the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not been reached and the hit start designation command has not been received, this process is terminated as it is. When the current elapsed time has reached the above-mentioned waiting time, it is determined that the variable display result of the special figure game is "missing", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", and this process is terminated. Since the current elapsed time has not reached the above-mentioned waiting time and the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed, this process is terminated as it is.

The hitting process in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y. Operating the staging display devices 5X and 5Y, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands to the LED control board 14 (illumination signals). ) Is used to control various effects such as turning on and off the effect LED 9 during a predetermined period in which the big winning door as an attacker is open. In the hitting process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11.

The ending process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”, and is a process for executing the ending at the end of the big hit game state. In the ending process, the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y perform display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended.

Next, an example of the combined effect including the movable body effect and the display device effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of the composite effect in FIGS. 50A to 50F.

First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), for example, after the reach state is established during the predetermined symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the effect display device 5A. It moves closer to the position on the front side, and displays indicating that it has developed into a super reach effect or the like are executed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y.

After that, as shown in FIG. 50C, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y come into contact with each other to form one display unit, and the display unit is urged to operate the operation means. The image is displayed.

When the player operates the operating means during the operation acceptance period of the operating means, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the standby position and the movable body effect in the present embodiment is shown as shown in FIG. 50 (D). The movable body effect is executed assuming that the start condition of is satisfied, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable body 500L, 500R are produced and the movable body unit is changed from the operation standby mode to the first operation mode. Changes to. At this time, each movable body is superimposed on the front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult to see from the player.

When the first operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, and 500R are housed, and the first movable body 300 and the first movable body 300 and the first movable body unit are stored. 4 The movable bodies 600L and 600R perform an effect operation, and the movable body unit changes from the first operation form to the second operation form. Also at this time, each movable body is superimposed on the front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult to see from the player. Further, during execution of the movable body effect (for example, when the movable body unit changes from the operation standby mode to the first motion mode as shown in FIG. 50 (D), and when the movable body unit is in the first motion mode, FIG. 50 When changing to the second operation mode as shown in (E), the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device) 6B light emitting component (LED), at least one of the light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2) is turned off or the brightness is lower than when the movable body effect is not executed. It is emitting light. As a result, the movable body effect can be made to stand out, and the player can be watched by the movable body effect. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Next, when the second operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the storage operation of the first movable body 300 and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R is executed, and the movable body effect is completed. Then, the super reach effect is executed, and after the execution of the super reach effect, for example, in the case of a big hit, the effect display device 5A aligns the symbols indicating the big hit (for example, 7-7-7, etc.) and displays them. , An effect image (for example, a character, a character, etc.) is displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the first movable body 300 provided so as to be operable, and the first movable body 300 are controlled. A CPU 120 for effect control as a control means for the above is provided, and the window portion 51 is arranged on the game region 10 side of the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250, and the hole portion 270 is formed. A second permeable body 260, and at least a part of the first movable body 300 enters the space portion S formed between the first permeable body 250 and the second permeable body 260 via the hole portion 270. It is possible, and the first movable body 300 can perform the second operation of moving to the first effect position that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. That is, the first movable body 300 can be made to enter the first effect position shown in FIG. 35 or 36 at once from the first standby position (origin position) shown in FIG. 34, providing a surprising movable body effect. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the acceleration advance means for accelerating and advancing the first movable body 300 between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 (with the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700). The slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 can be accelerated diagonally downward along the rail 701 of the base member 700 to advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, since the rail 701 of the base member 700 is a guide member having a diagonally downward linear path (downward guide path portion), the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is downward along the diagonally downward rail 701. By being guided, the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced to the second position P2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. In addition, a part of the rail 701 may have a part other than the downward direction.

Further, the first movable body 300 is a first standby position (or a position where a part thereof may be superimposed on the display means) shown in FIG. 34, which is a position not superimposed on the effect display device 5A (display means). It is possible to operate from the origin position) to the first effect position shown in FIG. 35 or FIG. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 at the origin position suddenly appears at the first effect position, so that the player Can give a surprise to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. After executing the first control of moving the front transmission plate 251 to the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 and the first control, a predetermined portion (front half) of the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302. The first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the above, is moved in a direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control, or after the first control is executed, the main body portion 302. The second protruding portion 304, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the surface A, is moved in a direction (front upward direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control. It is possible to perform the second control to cause the operation. According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the first movable body 300 toward the first transmissive body 250, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 or the second By performing the second control of moving the protrusion 304) on the side of the first transmissive body 250 with respect to the second transmissive body 260 in a direction different from the movement direction (front down direction) in the first control (front up direction). , Since the player can give an impact, the effect of the production can be improved.

Specifically, not only the first control for moving the first movable body 300 to the first transmissive body 250 side, but also a direction different from the movement direction (front and lower direction) in the first control after the first control is performed. By performing the second control of moving in the (forward and upward direction), a part of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304) is expanded and the first movable body 300 is expanded. Because it looks like it is, it can have an impact on the player.

Further, the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game ball can flow down from the game board surface 200A, and forms a flow area of the game ball between the game board surface 200A and the game board surface 200A. Therefore, the hole portion 270 is formed at a position corresponding to an effect region (opening 2c formed in the board plate 200) that does not correspond to the flow-down region of the game ball in the game region 10. That is, since it is necessary to secure the flow area of the game ball, there is a limit to increasing the hole portion 270, and in order to allow the first movable body 300 to pass through the hole portion 270, the first movable body 300 is used. It cannot be larger than the hole 270.

Therefore, as in the present invention, after performing the first control for moving the first movable body 300 to the front side, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304). ) Is moved in a direction (front-up direction) different from the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmission body 260, so that the hole portion 270 is made more than necessary. A part of the main body 302 is expanded when the first movable body 300 is viewed from the front (player side) at a position closer to the player on the front side than the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the size. Because it can be made to look like, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect to the player.

Further, in the second control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302, in the moving direction (front lower) in the first control. Move in the direction (forward and upward) that intersects with the direction). By doing so, it is possible to suitably show the movement (protruding operation) of the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304 of the first movable body 300 in the second control.

Further, in the second control, the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302, intersect with each other in the moving direction (front downward direction) in the first control. The first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304 are placed around the main body 302 when viewed from the front in order to move the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304 in the front-up direction, which is a direction and is a direction along the front transmission plate 251. Since it can be expanded and moved toward the player side, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect.

The first movable body 300 moves in the direction opposite to the game area 10 (front side) in the second control, that is, moves so as to gradually protrude to the front side by the first control and the second control, so that a powerful effect is produced. It can be performed.

Further, since the first movable body 300 moves to the front side while descending forward and downward from the first standby position to the first effect position by the first control, the player side is compared with the one that moves horizontally. It is possible to make it easier to understand how it moves toward. Further, since not only the surface A of the main body 302 but also the surface B can be visually recognized when moving forward, the main body 302 can be made to look larger.

Further, in the first operating mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R supporting the first movable body 300, and in the second operating mode, the fourth movable body 600L supporting the first movable body 300. , 600R and other support means are provided. By doing so, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the first movable body 300 during and after the operation.

More specifically, the first movable body 300 is operably supported by the base member 700 provided on the back surface side of the game board 2, and moves to the front side via the board surface plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since the moving distance is longer than that of the conventional movable body that moves only to the front of the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to stably support it via a guide rail or the like, but to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. If a guide rail or the like is provided, the visibility may be deteriorated because the guide rail or the like makes it difficult to see a part of the game area 10 behind when the movable body effect is not executed. Therefore, by supporting only during the effect operation by the other fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R and the like in this way, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game area 10 from deteriorating when the movable body effect is not executed. can.

Further, a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the first movable body 300 is provided, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first. After performing one control, it is possible to control the first movable body 300 to move the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, and the like so as to be able to be combined. By doing so, the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) support each other by the union. Therefore, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

Specifically, in the first operation mode and the second operation form of the movable body unit, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R different from the first movable body 300 are Since the first movable body 300 is arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the peripheral position, the first movable body 300 may shake after the protruding operation of the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304 or the protruding operation. Even so, they can support each other and stabilize their posture.

Further, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first motion mode, or when the fourth movable body 600L, 600R is the first movable body 300 in the second motion mode. When combined with, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261. By doing so, when the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) are combined, Since the first movable body 300 is located at different positions in the moving direction (front-back direction) in the first control, a sense of depth can be generated.

Further, the window portion 51 can open and close the game area 10 (see FIG. 3), and the first movable body 300 does not come into contact with the second transmissive body 260 when opening and closing the window portion 51 (see FIG. 39). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transmissive body 260.

Specifically, the front portion of the first movable body 300 (the portion arranged on the front transmission plate 251 side of the hole portion 270 in the closed state of the opening / closing frame 50) is located in the rotation region Z of the hole portion 270. Since it is arranged, the rear transmission plate 261 does not come into contact with the first movable body 300 even if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed. According to this, for example, an operation error or the like occurs during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, and the first movable body 300 remains stopped at the first effect position. Even if it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, so that the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 are damaged. Can be prevented from doing so.

In the present embodiment, since the first movable body 300 is arranged in the rotation region Z of the hole portion 270 even during the execution of the first control and the second control in the movable body effect, the rear transmission is performed. Although the embodiment in which the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the plate 261 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening / closing frame 50 is not in contact with the second transmissive body when opening / closing. Just do it.

Further, the first movable body 300 has a light emitting means (for example, a movable body LED 350A, a movable body LED 350B, a movable body LED 350CL, 350CR) capable of irradiating light to a direction other than the first transmissive body 250 after performing the first control. , And movable body LEDs 350DL, 350DR, etc.) are provided. By doing so, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

Specifically, not only the movement effect of the first movable body 300, but also the light emission effect of the movable body LED 350A, the movable body LED 350B, the movable body LED 350CL, 350CR, and the movable body LEDs 350DL, 350DR can be performed, so that the effect is produced in a wide range. Can be appealed.

Further, a gaming machine frame 3 having a gaming board 2 for forming the gaming area 10, an opening / closing frame 50 having a window portion 51 which is openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening / closing frame 50. The effect LED 9 as a light emitting component on the opening / closing door side provided in an area other than 51 and the effect control CPU 120 as a light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the effect LED 9 are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 is a first movable body. It is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 to the first to fifth light emitting modes according to the operations of the 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R. .. By doing so, the movement of the first movable body 300 can be suitably produced.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode and then emit light in the second light emission mode having a lower brightness than the first light emission mode. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the transparency of the first movable body 300 and the like.

Specifically, after performing the first control in the first light emitting mode, in the second light emitting mode in which the brightness is lower than that in the first light emitting mode when the movable body unit is in the first operating mode (during the second control). Since the light is emitted, halation or the like occurs due to the light of the effect LED 9 at the time of the second control, which is an effect in which the first movable body 300 seems to be enlarged, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of each movable body. ..

Further, a gaming machine frame 3 having a gaming board 2 for forming the gaming area 10, an opening / closing frame 50 having a window portion 51 which is openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening / closing frame 50. The effect LED 9 as a light emitting component on the opening / closing door side provided in an area other than 51 and the effect control CPU 120 as a light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the effect LED 9 are provided, and the effect LED 9 is controlled by the first control. It is provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward the first movable body 300 after being broken. By doing so, the first movable body 300 can be made to stand out by light.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible (the above-mentioned configuration may be deleted). A modified example of the above embodiment is shown below. At least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the second transmissive body 260 is formed with a hole portion 270, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second transmissive body 260 may be formed with a notch having a size that allows the first movable body 300 to enter.

(Modification 5)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 moves diagonally downward from the first standby position (origin position) toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (arrow 1 in FIGS. 31 and 34). (See), but not limited to this. As in the modified example 5 shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and a first movement. The second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 that enters between the transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 may be feasible. That is, the first movable body 300 may be operated in two stages as shown in FIG. 51. For example, the first movable body 300 moves from the first standby position (origin position P0) that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 to the first position P1 directly below (the first operation ACT1). For example, movement in the hanging direction) is possible. Further, the first movable body 300 enters from the first position P1 toward the player side between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 through the hole 270 of the rear transmissive plate 261. A second operation ACT2 (for example, movement in the horizontal direction) that operates at the two positions P2 is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 is at an origin position that is not superimposed on the effect display device 5A (display means) (or may be a position where a part thereof is superimposed on the display means). It is possible to operate from P0 to the first position P1 or the second position P2. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 suddenly appears at the first position P1 or the second position P2. As it comes, it can surprise the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the first movable body 300 may have different operating speeds between the first motion ACT1 and the second motion ACT2. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed at the first speed V1. The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed at the second speed V2. The operating speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) is higher than the operating speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). For example, the first speeds V1 and V2 may be the maximum speed, the average speed, and the like. Specifically, in the process of S502 of the modification 5, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 52 (A). Whether or not to execute the movable body effect and, if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined by using the table.

As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "no execution" is 10%, "execution" and "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" are 20%. It is determined by probability, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the movable body effect than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the movable body effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTB-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is higher than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 is the first operation shown in FIG. 51. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifth modification, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2, which operates at the second position P2 that enters between the second transmissive body 260, is feasible. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 operates at the second position P2 that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful for the player. It is possible to provide a production. Further, the operation speed differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, the operating speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) is higher than the operating speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). Therefore, since the operating speed of the second position P2 close to the player is faster than the operating speed of the first position P1 far from the player, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

The operating speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) may be smaller than the operating speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). In this case, since the operating speed when the first movable body 300 enters through the hole 270 or the notch in the rear transmission plate 261 is slow, the vibration of the first movable body 300 in the second operation ACT2 Etc. (vibration in a direction different from the traveling direction, etc.) are reduced, and contact of the first movable body 300 with the hole portion 270 or the notch portion can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the failure of the first movable body 300 due to the second operation ACT2.

It should be noted that at least one of the operation speed, the operation range, the operation path, and the operation direction may be different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. In this modification 5, as shown in FIG. 52, the operation speeds of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 are different, and as shown in FIG. 51, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 operate. The directions are also different. For example, regarding the operating range, the operating range of the second motion ACT2 may be larger than that of the first motion ACT1, or vice versa. Further, regarding the operation path, the operation path of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than that of the first operation ACT1, or vice versa. Further, regarding the operation direction, the operation path of the second operation ACT2 may be larger or smaller than that of the first operation ACT1.

Further, as in another example 1 shown in FIG. 52 (B), the first movable body 300 has light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, etc.) associated with the operation in the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The light emission mode of 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) may be different. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed in the first light emission mode (for example, brightness I1). The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed in the second light emission mode (for example, brightness I2). The luminance I2 of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the luminance I1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the process of S502 of Another Example 1, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 52 (B). Whether or not to execute the movable body effect and, if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined by using the table.

As shown in FIG. 52 (B), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "no execution" is 10%, "execution" and "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by probability, and "second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the movable body effect than in the case of loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the movable body effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTC-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is higher than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 is the first operation shown in FIG. 51. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to another example 1, the first movable body 300 includes a first movement ACT1 operating at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and a first transmission body 250. The second operation ACT2, which operates at the second position P2 that enters between the second transmissive body 260, is feasible. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, since the first movable body 300 operates at the second position P2 that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the movable body is powerful for the player. It is possible to provide a production. Further, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) associated with the operation is different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, the second light emitting mode (for example, brightness I2) of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the first light emitting mode (for example, brightness I1) of the first operation ACT1. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the glare when the first movable body 300 approaches the player side.

The second light emitting mode (for example, brightness I2) of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than the first light emitting mode (for example, brightness I1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, when the first movable body 300 approaches the player side, it can be dazzled, and it is possible to provide a light emitting effect having an impact.

In another example 1, the light emitting means of the first movable body 300 (for example, the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) has different brightness as the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode. , Light intensity, emission color, blinking interval, emission sequence (for example, the order in which the movable LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR are lit, etc.) may be different.

Further, as in another example 2 shown in FIG. 52 (C), the first movable body 300 is a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) associated with the operation of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The production sound may be different. In the first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1), the production sound of the first production sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) is output. In the second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2), the production sound of the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) is output. The volume Vo2 of the second operation ACT2 is higher than the volume Vo1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the process of S502 of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 52 (C). Whether or not to execute the movable body effect and, if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined by using the table.

As shown in FIG. 52 (C), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "no execution" is 10%, "execution" and "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by probability, and "second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the movable body effect than in the case of loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the movable body effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTC-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is higher than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "first operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)" is executed, so that the first movable body 300 is the first operation shown in FIG. 51. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to another example 2, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 operating at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2, which operates at the second position P2 that enters between the second transmissive body 260, is feasible. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, since the first movable body 300 operates at the second position P2 that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the movable body is powerful for the player. It is possible to provide a production. Further, the effect sound associated with the operation (for example, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, it is assumed that the production sound of the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second operation ACT2 is louder than the production sound of the first production sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first operation ACT1. Therefore, the second movement close to the player of the first movable body 300 can be excited by the effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

The production sound of the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second operation ACT2 may be smaller than the production sound of the first production sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, the second motion ACT2 itself of the first movable body 300 can be focused on by intentionally weakening the effect by the effect sound for the second motion close to the player of the first movable body 300. For example, the silence effect allows the first movable body 300 to gaze at the second motion ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

In this alternative example 2, the volume of the effect sound accompanying the operation is different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the volume, pitch, tempo, music, melody, and the like of the effect sound accompanying the operation may be different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. As an example, as an example in which the music is different, in the first production sound mode of the first operation ACT1, for example, the music A is reproduced at a predetermined volume, and in the second production sound mode of the second operation ACT2, for example, the music B is a predetermined volume (music). It may be played back at the same volume as in A). Further, as an example in which the music and the volume are different, in the first production sound mode of the first operation ACT1, for example, the music A is reproduced at the first volume, and in the second production sound mode of the second operation ACT2, for example, the music B is the second. It may be played at a volume (a volume different from the first volume in the case of the music A).

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (C), the first movable body 300 performs the second operation ACT2 after the execution of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 after the execution of the first operation ACT1. There is a case where it returns to the origin position P0 without execution, and the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The player can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved. For example, when the second motion ACT2 has a higher expectation than the first motion ACT1, the second motion ACT2 is coupled with the motion effect at a position closer to the player than the first motion ACT1. The effect of moving body production can be enhanced.

Further, as the advance notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variation display of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), various advance notice effects can be executed at a plurality of timings from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It has become. These notices include a reach notice that suggests whether or not to reach, a reach development notice that suggests whether or not to develop into an advantageous reach, and a big hit notice that suggests the possibility of a big hit. The movable body effect of the above-described embodiment or modification may be executed in these advance notice effects.

As an example of determining the movable body effect at the time of the reach development notice, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data. And the table for determining the movable body effect shown in FIG. 53 (B) may be used to determine the operation pattern of the movable body effect. It should be noted that whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined. As shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, "only the first operation ACT1" is determined with a probability of 30%, and "the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1" has a probability of 70%. Is determined by. In the case of developing into super reach, it is easier to execute the movable body effect of "second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1" than the movable body effect of "first operation ACT1 only", and the big hit about the movable body effect. You can have a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game will improve.

As for the movable body effect at the time of the reach development notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (A1), the normal reach effect is started, and an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, when the first operation ACT1 is determined by using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53 (B), the first operation is determined as shown in FIG. 54 (A2). The movable body 300 performs the first operation ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1). When the second operation ACT2 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53 (B), after the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 54 (A2) performs the first operation ACT1. As shown in FIG. 54 (A3), the second operation ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 advances to the second position P2 toward the player side) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (A4), the super reach development is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. In addition, in the case of only the first operation ACT1, it may not develop into super reach. Further, in the determination example shown in FIG. 53B, a reach development pattern indicating reach development without the first movable body 300 not operating may be provided so as to be selectable.

As an example of determining the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and together with the extracted numerical data. The operation pattern of the movable body effect may be determined by using the table for determining the movable body effect shown in FIG. 53 (C). Further, in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, the movable body effect is not executed. That is, the first movable body 300 does not operate and remains stopped at the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body effect of "second operation ACT2 after first operation ACT1" is executed. As shown in FIG. 51, if the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect of executing the second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1, and the first movable body 300 operates ( After the first action ACT1, the second action ACT2) can be known that a big hit will be made (big hit confirmation notice), and the interest of the game is improved.

As for the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (B1), the super reach effect is started, and the operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed in the fanning effect. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 54 (B2), the first movable body 300 moves to the first operation ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1). Move). Then, in the case of the super reach (big hit) shown in FIG. 53 (C), as shown in FIG. 54 (B3), the first movable body 300 is the second operation ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 is a game. 2nd position P2 advance toward the person side). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (B4), a big hit display is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach (loss) shown in FIG. 53 (C), the first movable body 300 does not operate, and as shown in FIG. 54 (B5), the first movable body 300 stops at the origin position P0. The loss is displayed as it is. That is, in the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, it is possible to know that if the first movable body 300 operates (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1), it will be a big hit (big hit confirmation notice).

In FIG. 54 (B1), the stick controller 31A is operated when the first movable body 300 is at the origin position P0, but as shown in FIG. 54 (B2), the first movable body 300 is in the first position. After moving to P1, the operation effect of executing the second operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 based on the operation of the stick controller 31A may be executable. For example, "does not operate" shown in FIG. 53 (C) may be changed to "only the first operation". In this case, it is possible to provide an motion effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second motion ACT2 based on the detection of the player's motion. That is, the player can be watched as to whether or not the first movable body 300 in the first position P1 moves to the second position P2, the player can be made to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to.

Further, at the first timing and the second timing in the variable display (variable display), the execution ratio in which only the first operation ACT1 is executed and the execution ratio in which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1 May be different. For example, only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach development notice shown in FIG. 53 (A) and the execution timing (second timing) of the jackpot notice shown in FIG. 53 (A). The execution rate is different from the execution rate at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1. In this case, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, both execution ratios may be different at a plurality of timings in a predetermined notice (for example, reach development notice).

(Modification 6A)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 is moved diagonally downward from the first standby position (origin position) to the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIG. 34). However, it is not limited to this. As in the modification 6A shown in FIG. 55, the first movable body 300 may be operated from the origin position P0 to the second position P2 by the concave arcuate path RT1 or by the convex arcuate path RT2. You may. That is, the downward guide path portion (rail, guide member, etc., which is not shown) of the first movable body 300 may be formed in a convex or concave downward arc-shaped path. According to the modification 6A, the first movable body 300 can be guided by a downward arcuate path, and the first movable body 300 can be accelerated downward and advanced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

(Modification 6B)
Further, as in the modified example 6B shown in FIG. 56, after the first movable body 300 operates from the origin position P0 to the first position P1, the first movable body 300 is concave at the first position P1 and the second position P2. It may be possible to swing along the arcuate path RT3. That is, the swing guide path portion (rail, guide member, etc., which is not shown) of the first movable body 300 may be formed in a concave arc-shaped path. According to the modification 6B, since the first movable body 300 can swing along the concave arcuate path RT3, it is possible to provide a movable body swing effect in which the first movable body 300 is advanced and retracted. be able to. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

(Modification 6C)
Further, as in the modified example 6C shown in FIG. 57, the first movable body 300 can advance to the intermediate position PS1 of the concave arcuate path RT1 and the advance position PS2 advanced from the intermediate position PS1. The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs depending on whether the movable body 300 advances to the intermediate position PS1 or the first movable body 300 advances to the advance position PS2. May be good. According to the modification 6C, the degree of expectation (for example, a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state depending on whether the first movable body 300 advances to the advance position PS1 or the first movable body 300 advances to the advance position PS2. Since the degree of expectation etc.) is different, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved. For example, if the advance position PS2 has a higher expectation than the intermediate position PS1, the advance position PS2 will produce an operation at a position closer to the player than the intermediate position PS1, and the movable body effect will be produced. The effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 6D)
Further, as in the modified example 6D shown in FIG. 58, the window portion 51 includes wall portions WL and WR (partition plates) extending in the direction connecting the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. The wall portions WL and WR may be erected on at least one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window portion 51 can be increased. Further, the wall portions WL and WR may be connected by the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window portion 51 can be further increased. In particular, in the window portion 51 having the space portion S into which the first movable body 300 can enter, such an improvement in strength is useful. The wall portions WL and WR are formed with downward linear or arcuate guide holes WL1 and WR1 (or guide grooves) that guide the first movable body 300 to the second position P2, respectively. .. Protruding rod portions BP protruding from the left side surface and the right side surface of the first movable body 300 can be inserted into the guide holes WL1 and WR1 of the wall portions WL and WR. Therefore, the wall portions WL and WR can not only increase the strength of the window portion 51 but also reduce the vibration of the first movable body 300 operating at the second position P2 in the vertical direction. Can be stably supported.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the rail 701 advances toward the hole 270, but does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, but the rail 701 The (guide member) may enter between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 via the hole portion 270. According to this, since the rail 701 can advance toward the hole 270 or the notch, the advanced rail 701 accelerates the first movable body 300, and the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 You can advance in the meantime. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

Further, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be restricted based on the opening detection of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. According to this, it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 and the second transmissive body 260 from being damaged.

In the above-described embodiment, when the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302 by the execution of the second control, the first when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the protruding portion 303 protrudes out of the region corresponding to the hole portion 270, that is, does not protrude toward the game region 10 of the game ball, the first protruding portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in the modified example 7 of FIG. 59, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 corresponds to the gaming area 10 of the gaming ball. It may be moved so as to overlap the region to be formed, or as shown in the modified example 8 of FIG. 60, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is located in the region corresponding to the gaming region 10 of the gaming ball. The entire main body 302 may be moved so as to overlap.

(Modification 7)
Here, a modification 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 7. As shown in FIG. 59, in the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300, the movable portions 306L and 306R can be moved in the left-right direction to a predetermined portion located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. In the case where the movable portions 306L and 306R are moved outward, at least a part of the movable portions 306L and 306R is outside the region corresponding to the hole portion 270. It may overlap with the position corresponding to 10.

(Modification 8)
Further, a modified example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 8. As shown in FIG. 60, in the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300, the protruding portions 307L and 307R project against the main body portion 302 at a predetermined portion located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. In the case where it is provided, the first movable body including the main body portion 302 is provided so that at least a part of these protrusions 307L and 307R overlaps with the position corresponding to the game area 10 which is outside the area corresponding to the hole portion 270. The entire 300 may be moved in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302 in front of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Although an embodiment in which the transparent plate can be moved to the front side until it is located on the 251 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the non-movable body provided in the base portion inoperably is provided. , It may be provided so as to be located on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Further, in this case, not only the movable body used for producing the movable body, but also, for example, at least a part of the guide passage capable of guiding the game ball is provided through the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 through the rear transmission plate 261. It may be provided so as to be located on the front transmission plate 251 side.

For example, the warp passage 800 as an example of the guidance passage is a guidance passage that guides the game ball flowing down the game area 10 to a predetermined area (for example, a stage, a winning opening, etc.), and the guidance passage is such a warp. Not limited to the passage 800, it may be a winning passage for guiding the winning ball that has entered the winning area, a ball passage for directing, or the like.

(Modification 9)
Here, a modification 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. 61 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the fixed ball passage of the modified example 9, and FIGS. 61B and 61C are vertical cross-sectional views showing the mobile ball passage of the modified example 7.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), a hole formed in a rear transmission plate 261 is a part of a passage forming member 801 made of a translucent synthetic resin material that forms a warp passage 800 in which a part bends forward. It is inserted into the portion 271 from the back surface side, and a part of the warp passage 800 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 271.

By doing so, it becomes possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down the position close to the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 through the passage forming member 801. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. ..

Further, a passage forming member made of a translucent synthetic resin material forming a first warp passage 800A for flowing the game ball in a straight line and a second warp passage 800B for causing the game ball to meander and flow down. A part of 801 is provided so as to be movable back and forth between the first passage position (see FIG. 61 (B)) and the second passage position (see FIG. 61 (C)) in front of the first passage position. When moving to the second passage position, at least a part of the second warp passage 800B may be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 271 formed in the rear transmission plate 261.

By doing so, it becomes possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down the position close to the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 through the passage forming member 801. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which a part of the main body portion 302 that moves by the second control is the first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304 that protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 302 has been exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and in the movable body, a portion (predetermined portion) or a part thereof located on the first transmissive body side of the second transmissive body via the hole portion by the first control is the second. It suffices if the control can move in a direction different from the movement direction in the first control. That is, the portion that operates in the second control is not limited to the portion that operates in a protruding manner, and may be a portion that can be moved by sliding movement, rotation, or the like. Further, the moving direction of the predetermined portion of the movable body can be freely changed, for example, left-right, up-down, diagonal direction, etc., if it is different from the moving direction of the movable body in the first control.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, only a predetermined portion (front half portion) of the main body portion 302 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire first movable body 300 may be located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300, which is an example of the movable body, exemplifies a form in which the first movable body 300 slides forward and downward from the first standby position to the first effect position. It is not limited to this, and it may move horizontally to the front side from the first standby position to the first effect position, or may move to the front upper side, the front left side, the front right side, or the like. That is, it suffices if it is provided so as to be movable from the rear side to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. Further, as long as it moves to the front side, it may move to the front side by rotation instead of slide movement.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300, which is an example of the movable body, exemplifies a form in which the front portion is arranged in the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 in the first standby position. The present invention is not limited to this, and the whole may be arranged so as to be located behind the rear transmission plate 261 in the first standby position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when only the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, the predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. Is not limited to this, and when a plurality of movable bodies such as the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R move to the effect position, the predetermined portion is transmitted backward. It may be located in front of the plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 exemplifies a form in which the first movable body 300 is arranged at an upper position of the effect display device 5A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arrangement position of the movable body is not limited to this. Can be changed arbitrarily.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a movable body that operates so that a predetermined portion is positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261 when moved to the effect position, the first movable body that is a movable accessory for effect is used. Although 300 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. are moved to the effect position, the predetermined portion is specified. May be applied as a movable body that operates so as to be located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, or may be a movable body for effect provided separately from these. Further, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the first hold display are not limited to the movable accessory for the effect connected to the effect control board 12 in this way. Even if various display devices connected to the main board 11, such as 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal figure hold display 25C, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc. are applied as movable bodies. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 as a movable body exemplifies a form in which at least a part (second half) is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be provided on the front side of the game board surface 200A of the board surface plate 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body is supported by a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body. Although the form as the support means has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a lock mechanism or the like for fixing the movable body itself or a drive mechanism for operating the movable body at an appropriate timing may be used as the support means. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are combined with the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 600L, and the 600R are rearward from the rear transmission plate 261. Although the arrangement is illustrated, for example, the movable body can be expanded and contracted back and forth so as to extend from the position behind the rear transmission plate 261 to the position in front of the rear transmission plate 261. You may try to create a sense of depth.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are united with the first movable body 300, the first protruding portion 303 and the first protrusion 303 and the second are controlled by the second control. 2 The form in which the protruding portion 304 protrudes is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304 may protrude or move at the same time as or before the coalescence. You may do so.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, and the window portion 51 includes a first transmissive body 250 and a first transmissive body 250. The first transmissive body 250 has a front transmissive plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion and a first tubular body 252 as a tubular portion. And a second tubular body 253, and the tubular portion has a reinforcing structure portion 254.

In this way, by having the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion, the front transmission plate 251 and the rear as the plate-shaped portion can be obtained without increasing the plate thickness of the opening / closing frame 50. Since the transmission plate 261 can be arranged apart from each other, the effect of effect is improved, and since the tubular portion of the first transmission body 250 is reinforced, the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 251 which are the plate-like portions of the first transmission body 250 are reinforced. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as an unauthorized member entering from a tubular portion that covers the periphery of the space portion S formed between the transparent plate 261 and the transparent plate 261.

More specifically, the tubular portion composed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is provided so as to be visible to the player so as to project forward from the opening of the opening / closing frame 50. There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as entering fraudulent members from the tubular part while avoiding the front transmission plate 251 made of plates will be performed. Since the strength of the tubular portion is improved, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as bending the tubular portion to create a gap between the tubular portion and the front transmission plate 251 or making a hole to allow an unauthorized member to enter. ..

Further, the reinforcing structure portion 254 is an uneven portion (for example, a convex portion 254A, 255A, a concave portion 254B, 255B, etc.) extending from the front transmission plate 251 toward the second transmission body 260. , The tubular portion can be suitably reinforced. More specifically, since the strength in the front-rear direction is improved, it is possible to prevent the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 from being damaged by an impact when an external force is applied such as the front transmission plate 251 being hit. ..

Further, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion are formed in a tubular shape by a non-translucent synthetic resin material. Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the first tubular body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular body 253 are plated, ambient light (for example, external light or an adjacent gaming machine) can be used. It is possible to prevent light or the like from entering and deteriorating the visibility of the game area 10.

Further, by forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion, and such unevenness is formed. By plating the portion and the outer peripheral surface, the decorative portion is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion, so that the appearance can be improved.

Further, an upper plate 90 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball is provided below the window portion 51, and the front transmission plate 251 is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the game region 10. , It is possible to prevent the first transmissive body 250 from becoming an obstacle when the game ball is thrown into the upper plate 90.

Further, the first permeator 250 and the second permeator 260 are separably integrated. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 are integrated by attaching the screw N2, and can be separated by removing the screw N2. ing.

By doing so, for example, one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 may be scratched or deteriorated over time, so that the visibility of the game area 10 may be reduced or damaged. When it becomes necessary to replace the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, only one of them can be partially replaced, so that the cost at the time of replacement can be reduced. .. In particular, only the second transmissive body 260 having the rear transmissive plate 261 having a different shape and position of the hole 270 depending on the model can be replaced, and the first transmissive body 250 can be used in common with a plurality of models. Become.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the hole portion 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 constituting the second transmission body 260 is located at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the board surface plate 200, that is, a flow region of the game ball. Although the embodiment formed at the position corresponding to the area other than the area (effect area) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part thereof is formed at the position corresponding to the flow area of the game ball. You may be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the hole portion 270 is formed in the post-transmissive plate 261 constituting the second transmissive body 260 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the post-transmissive plate is not limited thereto. A notch may be formed in 261. Specifically, for example, in order to make the game area 10 visible, the rear transmission plate 261 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the game area 10, but a notch is formed in a part of the peripheral edge thereof. The movable body may be moved forward through the notch until it is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the hole 270 is provided at only one place, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hole and the notch are formed at a plurality of places. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first transmissive body 250 includes a front transmissive plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion made of a transparent member, and a first tubular body 252 and a second tubular body 253 as a tubular portion. The first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are made of a non-permeable member, that is, a form in which a part of the first transparent body 250 is made of a non-permeable member is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 may also be composed of a permeable member. That is, the first permeable body 250 may have at least a part of a plate-shaped portion or a tubular portion made of a permeable member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second transmissive body 260 has a rear transmissive plate 261 and a frame body 262, and the frame body 262 is composed of a non-permeable member, that is, the second transmissive body. Although a form in which a part of the body 260 is made of a non-permeable member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame body 262 may also be made of a transparent member. That is, the second transmissive body 260 may be at least partially composed of a transmissive member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are applied as the tubular portion constituting the first transparent body 250, but the present invention is limited thereto. The tubular portion is completely tubular if it is composed of a wall portion that closes the side peripheral surface of the space portion S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. It may not be necessary, and may be composed of, for example, an arch-shaped side wall portion. Specifically, the tubular portion has a substantially quadrangular shape in the side view, but may have a triangular shape in the side view.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmissive plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion constituting the first transmissive body 250 and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion are separately separated from each other. Although the form configured by integrally assembling the members is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the plate-shaped portion and the tubular portion are formed by integral molding with a permeable synthetic resin material. You may do so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, that is, a form in which the tubular portion is composed of a plurality of members is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of a single member.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front transmissive plate 251 is a glass material, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are a non-transmissive synthetic resin material, and the post-transmissive plate 261 is a synthetic material having translucency. Although the form made of the resin material is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the front transmission plate 251 may be made of a translucent synthetic resin material or the back transmission. The plate 261 may be made of a glass material. Further, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 may be made of a translucent synthetic resin material.

(Modification 10)
Here, the modified example 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit as a modification 8 in FIG. 62, a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit in FIG. 62, and a cross section showing the window unit as another example in FIG. A plan view, (D) is a side view of (C).

As shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the tubular body 252A constituting the tubular portion of the first transmissive body 250 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, for example, the first movable body 300. The light emitted outward from the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR mounted on the first movable body 300 is in a state where the predetermined portion of the above is moved to the first effect position which is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. It passes through the tubular body 252A and is emitted to the left and right sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1.
Therefore, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the players who play the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to the players around it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), for example, in a state where the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is moved to the effect position which is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the upper part of the window portion 51 in the opening / closing frame 50 ( Alternatively, the light emitted from the effect LED 9 provided on the left and right sides or below may be transmitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space portion S through the tubular body 252A. .. By doing so, it is possible to irradiate light from directly above (or directly beside or directly below) the first movable body 300 that has moved to the first effect position, so that the effect of the first movable body 300 can be further improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first permeation body 250 and the second permeation body 260, the first permeation body 250 and the second permeation body 260 (For example, the light emitted from the effect LED 9 passes through the tubular body 252A from the side surface portion (cylindrical body 252A in FIG. 62) to the first movable body 300 inside the space portion S. By executing (for example, the first movable body 300 is light-emittingly decorated by being emitted), a decorative effect for decorating the first movable body 300 is executed. That is, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 can be decorated by a predetermined effect of the side surface portion (cylindrical body 252A in FIG. 62). Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of execution patterns as decoration effects. For example, the effect LED 9 is a full-color LED, and as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the effect LED 9 can emit light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. Depending on the type of the light emission pattern (the type of the execution pattern of the decorative effect), the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) may be different. For example, the degree of expectation may be in the relationship of blue (degree of expectation: small) <green (degree of expectation: medium) <red (degree of expectation: large). According to this, the player performs a decorative effect (a light emission effect of the first movable body 300 according to the degree of expectation by irradiating the first movable body 300 with blue, green, and red light from the effect LED 9). Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, even if the entire tubular body 252A does not have translucency, only a part thereof may have translucency. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), a see-through window 258 is formed on a part of the peripheral surface (for example, the left and right side surfaces) of the tubular body 252A made of a non-transmissive synthetic resin material. And arrange the effect display devices 5X and 5Y so that the display unit faces the perspective window 258 when the display unit is moved to the effect position where the display unit is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. The image displayed on the display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y inside S may be made visible through the perspective window 258. By doing so, a predetermined effect that the image displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y moved to the display position can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved. Can be done.

(Modification 11)
As in the modified example 11 shown in FIG. 63, the second transmissive body 260 (second transmissive member) has a light incident portion 260a through which light can be incident, and the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body) is the first. 2 The tubular body 252A (side surface portion) of the second transmissive body 260 has an LED 9a (light emitting component) arranged on the facing portion 3a facing the light incident portion 260a of the transmissive body 260, and the light incident portion 260a is formed from the LED 9a. The light incident on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) has a light guide portion 260b capable of guiding the inside of the tubular body 252A (side surface portion), and the light from the light guide portion 260b is a space portion of the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). It may be possible to emit light from the surface on the S side toward the first movable body 300. The tubular body 252A is, for example, a light guide member, and light incident on the inside of the tubular body 252A can be emitted from the surface on the space S side. Further, a light-shielding member 260c (incident suppression means) is provided at the tip of the tubular body 252A on the first transmissive body 250 side, and the light incident on the inside of the tubular body 252A is the first transmissive body. It is designed not to be incident on 250. A reflective member (incident suppression means) may be provided instead of the light-shielding member 260c.

According to the modification 11, the second transmissive body 260 of the opening / closing frame 50 in which the LED 9a is arranged in the gaming machine frame 3 and can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 receives the light incident from the LED 9a. A light guide portion 260b that can be propagated inside the transmissive body 260 and can be guided to the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) is provided, and light from the light guide portion 260b is first from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Since it is possible to emit light toward the movable body 300, it is possible to realize a decorative effect without electrically connecting the opening / closing frame 50 and the game machine frame 3 with a connection cable or the like. That is, it is not necessary to provide an electric component on the opening / closing frame 50. Therefore, the problem of biting the electrical wiring when closing the opening / closing frame 50 can be solved.

An LED 9a (light emitting component) is provided on the opening / closing frame 50 side, and the LED 9a on the opening / closing frame 50 side and the control board or power supply board provided on the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body) side are electrically connected by a connection cable. It may be connected to. According to this configuration, since the opening / closing frame 50 includes an LED 9a (light emitting component) for causing the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) to emit light, the tubular body from the LED 9a (light emitting component) only on the opening / closing frame 50 side. An optical path up to 252A (side surface) can be secured. Further, since it is not necessary to arrange the LED 9a (light emitting component) on the side of the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body), the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body) can be improved.

Further, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, as shown in FIG. 63, a plurality of types of movements (for example, rotation of the first movable body 300) are performed. , Expansion, rocking, deformation, etc.), and the execution pattern of the decorative effect differs according to these multiple types of movements (multiple types according to the rotation, expansion, rocking, and deformation of the first movable body 300). (For example, the light emitting mode of) may be used. In this case, it is possible to provide a variety of decorative effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, in the game area, a game area side light emitting component (for example, a light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52) different from the light emitting component (for example, LED9a shown in FIG. 63), a normal winning ball device 6A, or a normal variable A light emitting component (LED) of the winning ball device 6B and at least one of a light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2) are arranged, and when the decorative effect is executed, the game area The side light emitting component may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed. In this case, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 can be made conspicuous by irradiation with light from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Therefore, the player can be watched for the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the opening / closing frame 50 is arranged with an effect LED 9 (light emitting component on the opening / closing door side) different from the LED 9a (light emitting component) shown in FIG. 63, and when performing a decorative effect, the effect LED 9 is turned off or the decorative effect is performed. It may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the above is not executed. In this case, when the decorative effect is executed, the effect LED 9 (light emitting component on the opening / closing door side) of the opening / closing frame 50 is turned off or emitted with a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed, so that the first transmission is performed. The light emitted from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) transmitted through the light guide portion 260b to the first movable body 300 that has entered between the body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 is irradiated to the first movable body 300. The first movable body 300 is bright, and the decorative effect can be made conspicuous by darkening the parts other than the window portion 51 of the opening / closing frame 50. Therefore, the player can be watched for the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the predetermined effect may be executed based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the mode of the predetermined effect may be changed based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 12)
As in the modified example 12 shown in FIG. 64 (A), the specific effect may be executed in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. According to the modification 12, the effect of the effect can be improved by executing the specific effect on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Further, the specific effect on the side surface portion can be executed regardless of whether or not the first movable body 300 has advanced. For example, the first movable body 300 is placed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. By executing a specific effect on the side surface when entering, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Further, when the movable body does not enter between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, the execution of the movable body effect can be expected by executing the specific effect on the side surface portion. , The effect of the production can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) includes an image display means DP (for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, etc.) for displaying an image as the specific effect. According to this, since the image display means DP provided on the side surface portion displays the image of the specific effect, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, instead of the image display means DP, a projection means (projector) for projecting an image is provided, and the image from the projection means (projector) is projected onto the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) to form the tubular shape. The specific effect may be feasible on the body 252A (side surface portion).

(Modification 13)
As in the modified example 13 shown in FIG. 64 (B), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) is an image that guides and displays an image for the specific effect by guiding the incident light to the inside. A light guide display means (for example, a light guide plate GP) may be provided. For example, light incident on the tubular body 252A and guided inside the tubular body 252A is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the incident light is used to display the light guide on the light guide plate GP. Light from a light emitting component (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, etc. shown in FIG. 62) passes through the tubular body 252A and is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the light guide is displayed on the light guide plate GP by this incident light. Anything like that is fine. According to the modification 13, the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP) provided on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) guides and displays the image for the specific effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

(Modification 14)
As in the modified example 14 shown in FIG. 65 (A), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) includes a light guide member 260d capable of guiding the incident light, and the light guide member 260d emits a plurality of light. A corresponding area portion 260e (in FIG. 65, a corresponding area portion 260e having three horizontal rows) in which the light guide member 260d is divided into a plurality of portions 9b (a group of LEDs having three horizontal rows in FIG. 65) and each light emitting portion 9b. ) And. The tubular body 252A itself may be a light guide member. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding region portion 260e in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) corresponding to the light emitting portion 9b emits light. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding region portion 260e sequentially emits light from a side farther from the player to a side closer to the player. On the contrary, it may be an effect of sequentially emitting light from the one closer to the player to the one farther from the player. The specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modification 14, the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 65 (B), a plurality of types of light emitting mode patterns in which the light emitting modes in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) are stepwise different (a pattern in which only the corresponding region portion 260e on the innermost side emits light, and the innermost side). There are three types of patterns: a pattern in which the two intermediate region portions 260e emit light and a pattern in which all the corresponding region portions 260e emit light), and the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is determined according to the type of these emission mode patterns. It may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emitting mode pattern, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, as the specific effect, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, specific light emission patterns in which at least one of the light emission color, the brightness, and the blinking interval is different), and the control is performed in an advantageous state according to the type of the specific light emission pattern. Expectations may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when executing the specific effect, the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game board). At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of 2 may be turned off or emitted with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or the specific effect is emitted with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed, so that the specific effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side of the opening / closing door (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) is turned off or emitted with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. You can make a specific effect stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, it is provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion, and is based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, stick by the controller sensor unit 35A). The specific effect may be made executable (based on the operation detection of the controller 31A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, light from the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP shown in FIG. 64 (B)) or the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 65 (A)) is the first transmitter 250 and the first. It is also possible to provide an incident suppressing means (for example, a light shielding member 260c or a reflecting member shown in FIG. 63) for suppressing the incident on at least one of the two transmissive bodies 260. According to this, by the incident suppressing means (for example, the light shielding member 260c and the reflecting member shown in FIG. 63, the separated portion (gap portion), etc.), the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate shown in FIG. 64 (B)). It is suppressed that light from the GP) or the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 65 (A)) is incident on at least one of the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a part of the first permeator 250 or the second permeator 260 from becoming an unexpected light emitting mode. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the window portion 51 may be provided with a main body member to which the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 can be attached and detached. For example, the first permeator 250 is exposed to the player side, and the first permeator 250 may be intentionally injured by a malicious player or the like, and is more easily damaged than the second permeator 260. Further, regarding the second transmissive body 260, if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened while the first movable body 300 is advanced, the first movable body 300 may come into contact with the second movable body 300. As described above, since the first transmissive body 250 or the second transmissive body 260 can be exchanged in units, it is not necessary to exchange the entire window portion 51. Therefore, the parts replacement cost can be reduced, and the maintenance of the window portion 51 is excellent.

(Modification 15)
In the modified example 14, the light emitting portion 9b in three horizontal rows and the corresponding region portion 260e in three horizontal rows are used in FIG. 65, but as in the modified example 15 shown in FIG. The portion 9b and the corresponding region portion 260e of a plurality of vertical rows may be used. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding region portions 260e in a plurality of vertical rows emit light. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding region portion 260e emits light sequentially from the bottom to the top. On the contrary, it may be produced to emit light sequentially from top to bottom. The specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modification 15, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(Modification 16)
Next, a modification 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. 67 is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 16 in FIG. 67, and is a front view showing an effect mode of the light guide plate effect in FIG. 67. In the present modification 16, an example in which the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 function as a light guide plate will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), the front transmission plate 251 reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 290 incident inside from the left and right side end faces forward and emits the light from the front surface. The light emitting region E1 forming a predetermined light guide pattern, that is, the light emitting region E1 (see the halftone dot region in FIG. 67B) that emits light by the light incident on the inside of the front transmission plate 251 and the left and right side end faces. It has a non-light emitting region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 290 incident on the inside from the front and emits it from the front surface.

The rear transmission plate 261 is provided in the first movable body 300, and forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 291 incident inside from the side end surface of the hole 270 forward and emits it from the front surface. The light emitting region E2, that is, the light emitting region E2 (see the shaded area in FIG. 67 (B)) that emits light by the light incident on the inside of the back-transmitting plate 261 and the side end surface of the hole 270 are incident on the inside. It has a non-light emitting region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 291 forward and emits light from the front surface.

The light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed on the back side in a fine uneven state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LEDs 290 and 291 incident on the inside from the end face and emit it from the front surface. Specifically, the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed in an uneven state (rough surface) forming a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of the light is viewed from the side (detailed). Not shown).

When light is incident inside from the end faces of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 are designated by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses formed in the light emitting regions E1 and E2. An image (still image) is displayed (see the halftone dot area and the shaded area in FIG. 67B).

As shown in the present modification 16, the front transmissive plate 251 of the first transmissive body 250 and the rear transmissive plate 261 of the second transmissive body 260 serve as a light guide plate that guides the light incident from the end face to emit light. By functioning, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movable body effect. In particular, even when the movable body is moved to an effect position where the predetermined portion is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the light emitting region E1 can be emitted in front of the movable body to produce the movable body.

Further, by enabling the light emitting region E1 and the light emitting region E2 behind the light emitting region E1 to emit light, the light emitting regions E1 and E2 corresponding to the front-rear position of the movable body can be made to emit light, so that the movable body can emit light. It is possible to produce light emission at a closer location. Further, by simultaneously emitting light in the light emitting regions E1 and E2, it is possible to create a sense of depth in the front and back, so that the effect of effect is improved.

Further, in the present modification 16, the first transmissive body 250 attached to the opening / closing frame 50 side is provided by allowing the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the movable body to be incidented from the end face of the hole portion 270. Since it is not necessary to provide a light emitting body on the second transmissive body 260 and it is not necessary to route the wiring from the game machine frame 3 side on which the effect control board 12 is mounted, it is possible to avoid complication of the wiring work. The light emitting region E2 may be made to emit light by the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the window unit 51A side. Further, although the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are provided on both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, they may be provided on only one of them.

Further, in the present modification 16, an example in which the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are provided on both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 has been described, but the tubular portion is guided by the light incident from the end face. It may function as a light guide body that emits surface light. In this case, the tubular portion is composed of a translucent member having translucency, and light is incident from the front end or the rear end of the tubular portion so that the light emitting region provided on a part of the outer peripheral surface emits light. It should be.

(Modification 17)
As in the modified example 17 shown in FIG. 68, the movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) different from the first movable body 300 is provided, and the movable light guide plate MGP is the first position P1 of the first movable body 300. It can be located at the third position P3 between the second position P2, and when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. It may be possible to move to the four positions P4. For example, the movable light guide plate MGP is a light guide plate (transparent effect means) that displays light by guiding light inside, and is a light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown) at a third position P3 and a fourth position P4. It is possible to move with. As shown in FIG. 68, the fourth position P4 is a position closer to the first permeator 250 than the second position P2. The drive mechanism for the light guide plate (not shown) includes a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor (determining means) for detecting the position of the movable light guide plate MGP.

In the movable body effect execution process (S347G) of the modification 17 shown in FIG. 69, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71). When it is determined that the movement timing is (S71; Yes), the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP from the third position P3 to the fourth position P4 is started (S72). After the processing of S72, it is determined whether or not the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73). In the effect control CPU 120, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the 4th position P4, the detection signal of the 4th position sensor is turned on, and the movable light guide plate MGP is at the 4th position P4 based on the detection signal from the 4th position sensor. Can be determined to have reached. When the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73; Yes), the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 is started (S74), and the first movable body 300 is the first. The operation at the two positions P2 is executed (S75).

On the other hand, when the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4 (S73; No), the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted (S76). When the detection signal from the fourth position sensor is not turned on after a predetermined first time has elapsed from the start of movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4, the effect control CPU 120 has the movable light guide plate MGP. It may be determined that the fourth position P4 has not been reached. Further, the second time from the start of movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 (however, the second time is shorter than the first time and includes the time away from the third position P3). If the detection signal of the third position sensor does not turn off even after the lapse of time, the movable light guide plate MGP remains stopped at the third position P3, and the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4. You may judge.

As the content of limiting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S76), as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable body 300 is operated at the first position P1 and the second movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2. It may be possible to stop the movement of the first movable body 300, keep the operation of the first movable body 300 stopped, and the like.

After the processing of S76, the light guide plate operation abnormality flag indicating that the movable light guide plate MGP is operation abnormality is set to ON (S77). When it is not the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71; No), after the processing of S75, or after the processing of S77, the movable body effect execution processing is terminated.

According to the modification 17, when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, the first movable body 300 can be moved to the fourth position P4 which does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. It is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP is closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2, the movable light guide plate MGP has entered between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. Since the movable light guide plate MGP is moved to the fourth position P4 on the front side of the second position P2, it is possible to provide the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP advance. The effect of can be improved.

Since the movable light guide plate MGP is a transparent effect means for displaying light by guiding the light inside, the effect of the effect can be improved by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP. For example, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 and the first movable body 300 is located at the first position P1, that is, the movable light guide plate MGP is in front of the first movable body 300 at the first position P1. When it is located on the side, it is possible to perform a movable body effect by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP and the first movable body 300 located behind it, so that a powerful movable body effect is provided to the player. can do. Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4 and the first movable body 300 is located at the second position P2, that is, the light guide display of the advanced movable light guide plate MGP and the advanced first position behind it. Since the movable body effect can be executed by the movable body 300, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

When the movable light guide plate MGP cannot move to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is operated at the first position P1 instead of advancing the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from coming into contact with the immovable movable light guide plate MGP, and it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP from being damaged. Further, since the first movable body 300 operates at the first position P1, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort with respect to the movable body effect.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP cannot be moved to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is not moved to the second position P2, or the first movable body 300 is kept stopped. The first movable body 300 can be prevented from coming into contact with the immovable movable light guide plate MGP, and the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) may be different depending on whether the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 or the fourth position P4. .. According to this, the player can be watched for the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B). (LED), at least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2) is turned off or the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. The light may be emitted at a low brightness. According to this, it is possible to make the movable body effect stand out. Therefore, the player can be watched for the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the effect LED 9 (light emitting component on the opening / closing door side) of the opening / closing frame 50 is turned off or the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. May be made to emit light with low brightness. According to this, it is possible to make the movable body effect stand out. Therefore, the player can be watched for the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the second movement of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be feasible to move to position P2. According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 18)
In the modification 17, the fourth position P4 is located closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 68, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the modification 18 shown in FIG. 70, the fourth position P4 may be a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300. Even when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) is at a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300 as in the modified example 18, the first movable body 300 is in the second position. It is possible to provide a movable body effect that advances to P2 and the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4 away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, and the effect of the effect can be improved. ..

Further, since the movable body effect can be executed by locating the first movable body 300 that has advanced to the second position and the transparent effect means that has moved to a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, the player can perform the movable body effect. It is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

Further, although not particularly shown, as a support portion for supporting the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, which are tubular portions provided in the area other than the window portion 51 of the opening / closing frame 50, for example, the opening / closing frame 50. By providing an LED cover that is projected from the front surface of the window and forms a light emitting portion that emits light by the effect LED 9, the tubular portion is supported by the LED cover as a support portion, so that damage or fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion is arranged so as to close the opening on the front side of the tubular portion, and the entire area of the game area 10 can be visually recognized through the front transmission plate 251. The front transmission plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion is composed of a first plate-shaped portion that closes an opening on the front side of the tubular portion and a second plate-shaped portion that is arranged outside the tubular portion. It may be configured.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following modifications 19 and 16 are not limited thereto. As shown in, the front transmission plate 251 may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. Further, only a part of the front transmission plate 251 may be inclined and the other parts may be arranged in parallel.

(Modification 19)
Here, a modification 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. 71 is a vertical sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 19 in FIGS. 71A and 71B.

As in the modified example 9 shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), the front transmission plate 251 includes a first plate-shaped portion 251A that closes the opening on the front side of the tubular body 252A as a tubular portion, and a tubular body. It may be composed of a second plate-shaped portion 251B arranged outside the 252A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the first plate-shaped portion 251A is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, and the second plate-shaped portion 251B is arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. You may.
Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), both the first plate-shaped portion 251A and the second plate-shaped portion 251B may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R arranged below the first movable body 300 are positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261 even when they are moved to the effect position. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The movable body 300 can be moved to the front side until the predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261, and the second movable body Even if the 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R can be moved forward until the predetermined portion is located on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. good.

In this case, when each movable body is moved to the effect position, the first predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is on the front side of the predetermined portion of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R. It is preferable to be located at. By doing so, the movement amounts of the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (second movable body 400 and third movable body 500L, 500R) can be made different according to the inclination of the front transmission plate 251. ..

Further, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable body 500L, 500R are located below the player's line of sight when moved to the effect position, they are on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. When moving to, there is a risk that the game area 10 below the movable body (particularly, the starting winning opening, the large winning opening, etc.) will be difficult to see due to the movable body that has moved to the effect position. Therefore, as described above, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R below the first movable body 300 are moved so as not to protrude to the front side of the first movable body 300 at the effect position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lower gaming area 10 from being lowered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion is formed in a flat surface shape on the front surface, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front transmission plate 251 is not limited to this, and has a non-flat surface shape (for example,). It may be formed in a curved surface shape, a spherical shape, etc.).

(Modification 20)
Next, a modification 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. 72 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the window unit of the modified example 20 is located at the first viewing position, and FIG. 72 is a vertical cross section showing a state in which the window unit is moved to the second viewing position. It is a figure.

In the above embodiment, the window unit 51A is provided so as to be immovable with the tubular portion protruding forward with respect to the opening / closing frame 50, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, for example, the front transmission plate 251 is substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261 at a position distant from the rear transmission plate 261 forward, as in the first transmission body 250 of the window unit 51B of the modification 10. The lower side portion between the first visible position (see FIG. 72 (A)) and the second visible position (see FIG. 72 (B)) whose upper end is inclined forward with respect to the rear transmission plate 261. It may be provided so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 280 that faces in the left-right direction.

In this case, since the first transmissive body 250, which is a part of the window unit 51B, is provided so as to be able to project toward the player side from the first viewing position to the second viewing position, the player can perform the first permeation. It is difficult to see that the body 250 has moved to the second viewing position. However, the movement of the first movable body 300 forward in response to the movement of the first transparent body 250 to the second visual recognition position makes it easier to recognize that the first transparent body 250 has moved. Specifically, for example, by changing the tilt angle of the front transmissive plate 251 the incident angle of the light emitted from the movable body LED 350A to the front transmissive plate 251 changes, thereby changing the back surface of the front transmissive plate 251. The light reflected by the player increases, and not only the front surface of the game area 10 in the rear is illuminated, but also the amount of light emitted in the front is reduced, so that the visibility of the game area 10 from the player side is improved.

Further, the first movable body 300 also returns to the rear side according to the movement of the first transparent body 250 from the second visible position to the first visible position, so that the effect of effect is improved. Further, when the incident angle of the external light R with respect to the front transmission plate 251 changes, the light reflected by the front transmission plate 251 also changes, and the first movable body 300 and the game area 10 can be visually recognized through the front transmission plate 251. By changing the aspect, it becomes easy to recognize that the first permeator 250 has moved forward.

Further, since the movable body also pops out to the player side together with the first transparent body 250, an impact can be given. Further, since the lower side of the first permeator 250 does not move, it is possible to avoid obstructing other parts (for example, throwing the game ball into the upper plate 90 below).

In the modified example 20, as shown in FIG. 72, it is possible to execute a transmission member operation effect in which only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, but in addition to this, the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 can be executed. It may be possible to execute the transparent member operation effect that causes both of the above and the player to operate on the player side.

For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modification 20 shown in FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether it is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B is (S501; Yes), the type of the frame operation effect is determined (S501A). For example, in the processing of S501A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the frame operation effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the frame operation effect determination table shown in FIG. 73 (B). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the frame motion effect, and if there is execution, the motion pattern.

As shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, the "one-sided transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes)" is determined with a probability of 70%, and "both". The transmission member operation pattern (the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 project) ”is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "one-sided transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission member 250 protrudes)" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the "both transmission member operation pattern (both transmission member operation patterns). The first permeator 250 and the second permeator 260 protrude) ”is determined with a 70% probability. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, it is easier to execute the frame movement effect by both transparent member operation patterns than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, and the frame movement by both transparent member movement patterns is easy to be executed. With regard to the production, you can have a sense of expectation of a big hit, and the interest of the game will improve. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the one-way transmission member operation pattern is executed, the big hit is expected for the frame movement effect by the one-way transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes). You can have a feeling and the fun of the game will improve.

After the processing of S501A, the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the movable body effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 73 (C). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 73 (C), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "no execution" is 10%, "execution" and "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" are 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the movable body effect than in the case of loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the movable body effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTB-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is higher than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 51. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B but also in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach may include a fluctuation pattern having a pseudo-continuous fluctuation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

Returning to FIG. 73 (A), after the processing of S502, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504). After the processing of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not the super reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

In the modification 20, at least the transmission member operation effect of operating the first transmission body 250 on the player side can be executed, and by executing this transmission member operation effect, the first movable body 300 is the first transmission body. Since it is movable between the 250 and the second transmissive body 260, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the transmission member operation effect is an effect of operating only the first transmission body 250 on the player side, or an effect of operating both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 on the player side. , It is possible to provide a powerful transparent member operation effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, as the transmission member operation effect, only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, while both the transmission member operation pattern and the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are operated on the player side. There are both transmission member operation patterns, and the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot expectation degree) differs between the transmission member operation pattern and both transmission member operation patterns. Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the first movable body 300 is referred to as the first transparent body 250 based on the execution of the transparent member motion effect and the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be movable to and from the second transmissive body 260. In this case, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first motion pattern in which the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 moves between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movement is performed. A second motion pattern in which the body 300 does not move between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 may be feasible. In this case, it is possible to give variation to the movable body production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved. Further, since the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs between the first motion pattern and the second motion pattern, the player can be watched for the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the board 2) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the transmissive member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can be watched for the transparent member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. good. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can be watched for the transparent member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the window side light emitting component of the window portion 51 may be turned on or may be made to emit light with a higher brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can be watched for the transparent member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, it is provided with a detection means (for example, a position sensor for the first transparent body) for detecting that the first transparent body 250 has operated on the player side, and detects that the first transparent body 250 has operated on the player side. If so, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be executed. In this case, a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 after the first transparent body 250 operates toward the player side is appropriate. Can be executed. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved. Further, when the first transparent body 250 is not operating on the player side, the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the first transparent body 250 and the first transparent body 250 1 It is possible to prevent damage to the movable body 300.

(Modification 21)
As in the modified example 21 shown in FIG. 74, the opening / closing frame 50 (frame body) includes movable frame-side movable bodies SL and SR (frame-side movable means). The frame-side movable bodies SL and SR can be displaced between the non-protruding state shown by the broken line in FIG. 75 (A) and the protruding state shown by the solid line in FIG. 75 (A) by a drive mechanism for the frame-side movable body (not shown). It has become. Further, the frame interlocking effect (simply referred to as interlocking effect) for operating the frame side movable bodies SL and SR in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. May be feasible). In this frame interlocking effect, the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR start to operate are combined. It has become. That is, the first operation ACT2 to the second position P2 of the first movable body 300 and the operation in which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are in the protruding state shown by the solid line in FIG. 75A are synchronized. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect having an excellent interlocking feeling when the operation starts.

For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modification 21 shown in FIG. 76, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether it is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B is (S501; Yes), the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the movable body effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 76 (B). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "no execution" is 10%, "execution" and "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" are 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, it is easier to execute the movable body effect than in the case of loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of the big hit about the movable body effect, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTB-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is higher than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 51. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B but also in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach may include a fluctuation pattern having a pseudo-continuous fluctuation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After the processing of S502, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504).

After the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not the second operation pattern PTB-2 is determined (S504A). When the second operation pattern PTB-2 is determined (S504A; Yes), the type of the frame-side movable body effect, which is the effect in which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR operate, is determined (S504B). For example, in the processing of S504B, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the frame-side movable body effect, and also extracts the extracted numerical data and for determining the frame-side movable body effect shown in FIG. 76 (C). Using the table, it is determined whether or not to execute the frame-side movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, the "non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)" is determined with an 80% probability, and the "interlocking pattern (interlocking pattern). The first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are interlocked) ”is determined with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)" is determined with a 20% probability, and the "interlocking pattern (first movable body 300)" is determined. And the frame-side movable body SL and SR are linked) ”is determined with a probability of 80%. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the frame operation effect by the interlocking pattern is easier to be executed than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, and the first movable body 300 and the frame side movable body SL are easily executed. ， It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit about the interlocking production linked with SR, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, even in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit for the non-interlocking effect in which only the first movable body 300 operates without the frame side movable bodies SL and SR operating. , The fun of the game is improved.

After the processing of S504B, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not the super reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

In the modification 21, it is possible to execute a frame interlocking effect in which the frame-side movable means of the frame body is operated in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful frame-linked effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, an interlocking pattern that operates the frame-side movable means when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, and a non-interlocking pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means. Is feasible, so it is possible to have variations in the frame-linked production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the frame-linked production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, since the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between the interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern, the player can be watched for the frame interlocking effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, since the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the operation of the frame-side movable means is started are matched, both operations are started. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect with an excellent interlocking feeling. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

The timing of returning the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be matched with the timing of returning the first movable body 300 before the operation of the frame-side movable means. In this case, it is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect having an excellent interlocking feeling when both operations are completed. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, at least a part of the frame body operating means (for example, the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74) in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. It may be possible to execute a frame-linked effect in which. Here, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), at least a part of the ball striking operation handle HB is projected. The operation of the operating means may be, for example, such that at least a part of the operating means (for example, the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74) is an operation of at least one of vibration, rocking, advancement, retreat, and movement. .. According to this, since the operation of the operating means is directly transmitted to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a more powerful frame interlocking effect. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced. The operation means is not limited to the ball striking operation handle HB, and may be a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like.

Further, the first movable body 300 is placed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be possible to enter. In this case, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 22)
As in the modified example 22 shown in FIGS. 77 (A) and 77 (B), the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The size is different between the case where it is located between the second transmissive body 260 and the second transmissive body 260. For example, in the first movable body 300, the upper portion of the first movable body 300 can advance upward, and the lower portion of the first movable body 300 can advance downward, and can be expanded in the vertical direction. Is to be. Specifically, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, for example, when it is in the first position P1, the hole portion 270 of the second transparent body 260 (FIG. 24). The length LW in the vertical direction is smaller than the opening diameter (length LY in the vertical direction of the opening) of the hole portion 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 shown in 1. When the length of the hole is LX (however, each length is LY>LX> LW) and is located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, the opening diameter of the hole 270 (of the opening). The vertical length LZ is larger than the vertical length LY). For example, the first movable body 300 is extended in the vertical direction to a length LZ after coming out of the hole 270. When the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the first movable body 300 may be directed from the first position P1 toward the second position P2 at a constant speed, or may be a hole. The speed may be gradually increased until it enters the portion 270, and after entering the hole portion 270, it may move at a higher speed.

According to the modification 22, when the size of the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and when the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are located. Since it is different from when it is located in between, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable body. In particular, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, the first movable body 300 is smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, but the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. When it is located between and, it becomes larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270, so that the player can show the enlarged first movable body 300, and it is possible to provide a more powerful movable body effect. can.

(Modification 23)
As in the modified example 23 shown in FIG. 78, the first movable body 300 becomes smaller when entering the hole portion 270 of the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 The size is larger than that of the hole 270 both when it is not located between the first transmissive bodies 250 and when it is located between the first permeator 250 and the second permeator 260. For example, the first movable body 300 has a vertical length of LZ when it is not located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 (for example, when it is at the first position P1), and is the first. The length in the vertical direction when it is located between the transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 (for example, when it is at the second position P2) is also LZ, and both are larger than the hole portion 270 (hole portion). The opening diameter of 270 (larger than the vertical length LY of the opening). If the first movable body 300 is larger than the hole 270, it is the same at the first position P1 and the second position P2. It does not have to be the size.

According to the modification 23, the first movable body 300, which is larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270, once becomes smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, passes through the hole 270, and reaches the second position P2. Since it is larger than the opening diameter of the hole portion 270, it is possible to provide a movable body effect that is unexpected to change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable body.

In the modified example 22 and the modified example 23, the first movable body 300 is expanded in the vertical direction, but it may be expanded or deformed in at least one of the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions. good. Further, at least a part of the first movable body 300 is configured to be rotatable about the advance direction as a rotation axis, and when it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the first movable body 300 is expanded to the outer peripheral side by the rotation in the clockwise direction (for example, the first movable body 300). 1 When the blade portion of the movable body 300 is advanced in the radial direction or the circumferential direction, and conversely, when it is rotated counterclockwise, the outer peripheral side is reduced by the counterclockwise rotation (for example, the first). The blade portion of the movable body 300 may be housed in the direction of the center of rotation, the circumferential direction, or the like).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y provided so as to be operable, and the effect display device 5X , 5Y is provided with an effect control CPU 120, and the window portion 51 is arranged on the game region 10 side of the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250, and a hole portion 270 is formed. The effect control CPU 120 has a second transmission body 260, and the effect display device 5X, 5Y in a standby state is provided at a position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261, and a predetermined portion of the effect display device 5X, 5Y is rearward. It is possible to execute the third control of moving the transmission plate 261 to the front side through the hole portion 270 until the transmission plate 261 is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261.

By doing so, it is possible to move the predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y until it is located closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the rear transmissive plate 261 of the second transmissive body 260. Since it is possible to give more impact to the person, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be moved to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 while the display unit is slightly tilted so as to face the center side. By doing so, the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be preferably shown.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a direction (horizontal direction) intersecting the movement direction (front-back direction) in the third control after executing the third control. Control is feasible. By doing so, the display content of the display unit can be made visible to people other than the player.

Further, as described above, the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged so as to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game ball can flow down from the game board surface 200A, and the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged between the game board surface 200A and the game board surface 200A. The hole 270 is formed in the game area 10 at a position corresponding to an effect region (opening 2c formed in the board plate 200) that does not correspond to the flow area of the game ball. That is, since it is necessary to secure the flow area of the game ball, there is a limit to increasing the hole portion 270, and in order to allow the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to pass through the hole portion 270, the effect display device 5X, 5Y cannot be made larger than the hole 270.

Therefore, as in the present invention, after performing the third control for moving the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (the whole in the present embodiment) is displayed. By performing the fourth control of moving the hole 270 in a direction (left-right direction) different from the moving direction (forward direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmissive body 260, the hole 270 is not made larger than necessary. Moreover, since the display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be shown at a position closer to the player on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect to the player.

Further, in order to move the left and right effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side via the hole portion 270, the hole portion 270 is made larger than necessary because it is once moved toward the center and then passed through the hole portion 270. It is possible to pass through the effect display devices 5X and 5Y without any problems. Then, after passing through the hole portion 270, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be further moved in the left-right direction, so that the desired position (for example, the central effect display) is not limited to the position of the hole portion 270. The image displayed on the display unit can be shown at a position (such as a position where the device 5A is not obstructed or concealed). Further, after the movement, the effect display device 5A is located behind the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, so that a sense of depth can be generated.

Further, since the display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is arranged in front of the game area 10 by executing the third control, for example, it is provided at a predetermined position in addition to the notification of left-handed or right-handed. A notification image or the like for aiming and launching a game ball toward the winning area can be displayed from the front side of the game area 10 and near the target location.

Further, the rail member (not shown) that guides the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is produced when changing from the standby state to the first operating state and when changing from the first operating state to the second operating state. It functions as a contact prevention means for preventing contact between the display devices 5X and 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect display devices 5X and 5Y from coming into contact with the rear transmission plate 261 of the second transmission body 260 and being damaged.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the display device, an embodiment in which the effect display devices 5X and 5Y auxiliary provided on the side of the effect display device 5A capable of variable display of the effect symbol are applied has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display device may target the effect display device 5A, or a display device for effect (for example, movable) provided separately from the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y. It may be a display device mounted on the body or the like). Further, the display device for effect connected to the effect control board 12 in this way is not limited to the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the first hold display 25A. , Second hold display 25B, normal figure hold display 25C, and various other display devices connected to the main board 11.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 is exemplified in the third control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The display mode of the display screen is changed according to the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (for example, the image is enlarged or the design and the character are enlarged according to the forward movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y). By performing display control (such as moving or changing the background color), it is possible to improve the effect by moving the display device and changing the displayed image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the first operating state, the entire effect display devices 5X and 5Y are located in front of the rear transmission plate 261. The present invention is not limited to this, and only a predetermined portion (for example, a display portion) of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the fourth control, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved in the left-right direction and then rotated so that the display unit faces outward. The display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be rotated along the front transmission plate 251, and by doing so, the display unit may be moved closer to the player side. It will be possible to get closer.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided so as to be movable substantially in parallel in the front-back and left-right directions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third control is not limited thereto. It may be moved so as to incline upward or downward in the front-rear direction. Further, in the fourth control, it may be moved upward or downward.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which only the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 5A and others. The display device may be moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y as movable bodies are exemplified in a form provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 in a non-operating state, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, it may be provided on the front side of the game board surface 200A of the board surface plate 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged at positions corresponding to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10 when viewed from the front after the execution of the fourth control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, except for the position corresponding to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10 when viewed from the front after the execution of the fourth control (position corresponding to the effect area). That is, it is preferable to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y within the region corresponding to the hole portion 270.

Further, by doing so, as described with reference to the movable body as an example in FIG. 40, for example, an operation error occurs during the operation of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, that is, during the execution of the third control and the fourth control. Even when it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. Therefore, the rear transmission plate 261 and the effect display device can be opened. It is possible to prevent the 5X and 5Y from being damaged.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y within the region corresponding to the hole portion 270, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the opening / closing frame 50 does not come into contact with the second transmissive body when opening / closing.

For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11, and the main board 11 detects the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detecting switch. Based on this, the door opening designation command indicating that the opening / closing frame 50 has been opened is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Then, even if the effect control CPU 120 controls to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the standby position when the door opening designated command is received while executing the third control or the fourth control. good.

According to this, for example, when the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y is being executed, an operation abnormality of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y occurs, and the effect display devices 5X, 5Y cause the effect display devices 5X, 5Y. Even if it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance due to immobility on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 or ball clogging in the game area 10, the opening / closing frame 50 can be used. When the effect display device 5X, 5Y is opened, the effect display device 5X, 5Y is retracted toward a position where it does not contact the rear transmission plate 261 (for example, a standby position), so that the rear transmission plate 261 and the effect display device 5X, 5Y are prevented from being damaged. can.

Further, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened, even if the game ball that has stayed in the beaded state due to ball clogging falls, it is moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 by the third control, that is, to the front side of the game area 10. By retracting the moving effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the standby position side, it is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from colliding with the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. Therefore, the effect display device 5X due to the collision with the game ball. , 5Y can be prevented from being damaged, or the game ball can be prevented from bouncing due to a collision with the effect display devices 5X, 5Y and entering the back surface side of the board surface plate 200 through the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 issues a door open designation command while executing the first control or the second control of the first movable body 300, or the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. When received, not only the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved to the standby position, but also the running effect display is interrupted so that at least the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move. A notification that regulates the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 (for example, a voice saying "Please do not open the opening / closing frame" is output or a message is sent to the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, etc. until it moves to the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261. It may be displayed).

Further, a lock mechanism or the like for locking the opening / closing frame 50 in the closed state is provided, and the effect control CPU 120 is used for the first control and the second control of the first movable body 300, or the third control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. If a designated command for opening the door is received while executing the fourth control or the fourth control, the lock mechanism may be used to lock the door to restrict the opening of the opening / closing frame 50.

(A1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first movement that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 is the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 51. The first operation ACT1 that moves to the second operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),.
The operating speed differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the first speed V1 in the first operation and the second speed V2 in the second operation are different, etc. ).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A2) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
A light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) is provided.
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first movement that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 is the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 51. The first operation ACT1 that moves to the second operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),.
The light emitting mode of the light emitting means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, in the first light emitting mode I1 in the first operation and in the second operation. (For example, different from the second light emission mode I2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A3) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Sound output means capable of outputting directing sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) and
Equipped with
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first movement that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 is the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 51. The first operation ACT1 that moves to the second operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),.
The effect sound of the sound output means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) in the first operation ACT1. ) And the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) in the second operation ACT2 are different).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A4) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A3) above,
A display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A or the like) is visibly arranged through the window portion.
The movable body can be positioned at an origin position where the movable body is not superimposed on the display means or a part thereof is superimposed on the display means, and can operate from the origin position to the first position or the second position. Yes, you may.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

(A5) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A4) above,
Specific game information display means (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) related to a game regardless of the position of the movable body. , The specific game information display area 5Z in FIG. 1 and the like) may be provided.
According to this configuration, not only can a powerful movable body effect be provided, but also specific game information related to the game, that is, game information important to the player can be always shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent important game information from becoming invisible due to the movable body effect.

(A6) In the gaming machine of the above (A1)
The operating speed of the second operation may be larger than the operating speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 52 (A) is larger than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(A7) In the gaming machine of (A1) above,
The operating speed of the second operation may be smaller than the operating speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 52 (A) is smaller than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the failure due to the second operation of the movable body.

(A8) In the gaming machine of the above (A2)
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body and is provided on the movable body.
The second operation may have a lower emission brightness of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 52B is smaller than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the glare when approaching the player side.

(A9) In the gaming machine of the above (A2)
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body and is provided on the movable body.
The second operation may have a higher luminous intensity of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second luminance I2 in FIG. 52B is larger than the first luminance I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player dazzle when approaching the player side, and it is possible to provide a light emitting effect with an impact.

(A10) In the gaming machine of the above (A3)
In the second operation, at least one of the loud volume, the high pitch, and the fast tempo of the effect sound of the sound output means can be executed as compared with the case of the first operation (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 52 (C) may be larger than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(A11) In the gaming machine of the above (A3)
In the second operation, at least one of the fact that the volume of the effect sound of the sound output means is lower, the pitch is lower, and the tempo is slower than in the case of the first operation can be executed (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 52 (C) may be smaller than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(A12) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A1) to (A11),
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like) that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating is different from the second opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened when the movable body is not operating. You may do it.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be taken according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(A13) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A1) to (A12),
A control means for controlling the movable body (for example, an effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The control means is
The first control (for example, effect) of moving a predetermined portion of the movable body to the first transmissive member side until it is located closer to the first transmissive member than the second transmissive member through the hole portion or the notch portion. In the control CPU 120, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. The part where the first control of moving to the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side of 261) and
After executing the first control, the second control for moving at least a part of the predetermined portion in a direction intersecting the moving direction in the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executed the first control). After that, the direction (front) in which the first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, intersects the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control. A portion capable of executing the second control to move upward), or a second protrusion which is a part of a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302 after executing the first control. A portion capable of executing a second control for moving the unit 304 in a direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control) and
It is possible to do so.
According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the movable body to the first transmission member side, at least a part of the predetermined portion is moved on the first transmission member side of the second transmission member side in the first control. By performing the second control of moving in a direction different from the direction, the player can give an impact, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A14) In the gaming machine of the above (A13),
At least a part of the predetermined portion moves in a direction different from the game area in the second control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is one of the predetermined portions (front half) of the main body portion 302 in the second control. The first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304, which is a portion, may be moved in a direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body in the second control can be preferably shown.

(A15) In the gaming machine of (A13) or (A14) above,
Supporting means for supporting the movable body in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, in the first operation mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R supporting the first movable body 300, and the second In the operation mode, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. that supports the first movable body 300 may be provided.
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body and the posture after the movement can be stabilized.

(A16) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A15),
A second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) is provided.
The control means can control to move the second movable body to the movable body so as to be unitable after the first control is performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is after the first control is performed). , A portion capable of being controlled to move the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. to the first movable body 300 so as to be able to be combined).
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body support each other by the coalescence, the posture after the movement can be stabilized.

(A17) In the gaming machine of the above (A16),
When the second movable body is combined with the movable body, at least a part of the second movable body is arranged on the gaming region side of the second transmission member (for example, the second in the first operation mode). When the movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R are combined with the first movable body 300, or when the fourth movable body 600L, 600R is combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode, these second The movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are arranged behind the rear transmission plate 261 (see FIGS. 35 and 36). You may do it.
According to this configuration, the movable body and the second movable body are located at different positions in the moving direction of the movable body in the first control when they are combined, so that a sense of depth can be generated.

(A18) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A17),
The window portion (for example, the window portion 51) can open and close the game area (for example, the game area 10) (see FIG. 3).
The movable body may not come into contact with the second transmissive member when opening and closing the window portion (see FIG. 40).
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the movable body and the second transmissive member.

(A19) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A18),
The movable body is provided with light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) capable of irradiating light toward other than the first transmissive member after performing the first control. (See FIG. 38).
According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

(A20) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A19),
A gaming machine frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) having a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 2) for forming the gaming area (for example, a gaming area 10).
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame and having the window portion (for example, the window portion 51).
A light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) provided in an area other than the window portion of the opening / closing frame.
A light emitting control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that controls light emission of the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is provided.
The light emitting control means changes the light emitting mode according to the movement of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 includes a first movable body 300, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, and a fourth. A portion capable of changing the light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 to the first to fifth light emitting modes according to the operation of the movable bodies 600L and 600R. See FIG. 37).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body can be suitably produced.

(A21) In the gaming machine of the above (A20)
After the first control is performed, the light emission control means lowers the brightness as compared with that before the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode. After that, a portion for controlling light emission in the second light emitting mode in which the brightness is lower than that in the first light emitting mode.
(See FIG. 38).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the transparency of the movable body.

(A22) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A21),
A gaming machine frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) having a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 2) for forming the gaming area (for example, a gaming area 10).
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame and having the window portion (for example, the window portion 51).
A light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) provided in an area other than the window portion of the opening / closing frame.
A light emitting control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) that controls light emission of the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is provided.
The opening / closing door side light emitting component is provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward the movable body after performing the first control (for example, the effect LED 9 is provided with the first movable body after performing the first control. It is provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward 300. See FIG. 62 (B) of the modified example 10.
According to this configuration, the movable body can be made to stand out by light.

(A23) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A22),
The game area (for example, the game area 10) is provided with a guide passage (for example, a warp passage 800, etc.) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball).
In the guide passage, at least a part of the guide passage passes through the hole portion (for example, the hole portion 271) or the notch portion, and the first transmission is more than the second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260). It may be located on the member (for example, the first transmissive body 250) side (see FIG. 61 (A) of the modified example 7).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(A24) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (A13) to (A23),
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guidance passage (for example, a first warp passage 800A, a second warp passage 800B, etc.) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided.
The guide passage is first permeated until at least a part of the guide passage is located closer to the first permeation member than the second permeation member via the hole (for example, hole 271) or the notch. It may be movable toward the member side (see FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C) of the modified example 9).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(B1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body has a first operation that operates from the origin position to a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first transmission member and the second transmission from the first position. A second operation that operates at a second position that enters between the transparent member and the second operation is feasible (for example, the first movable as shown in FIG. 51 by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172. The body 300 can execute the first operation ACT1 that moves to the first position P1 and the second operation ACT2 that operates to the second position P2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1)
The movable body can return to the origin position without executing the second operation after executing the first operation.
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state differs between the first operation and the second operation.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like), an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like), and a door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing door. , Equipped with
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
After the movable body performs the first operation, the second operation of the movable body is restricted based on the opening detection of the opening / closing door by the door opening detecting means.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the movable body and the second transmissive member.

(B4) In the gaming machine of the above (B3)
In the first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating (for example, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating in S63 of FIG. 45B), the movable body is operating. It is different from the second opening notification (for example, the normal door opening notification of S65 in FIG. 45B) when the opening / closing door is opened when the door is not open.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be taken according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(B5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (B1) to (B4),
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
After the movable body executes the first motion, the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B is based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. It is possible to execute an operation effect for executing the second operation of the movable body (based on the operation detection).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (B1) to (B5),
The movable body can operate at a plurality of timings in the variable display.
At the first timing and the second timing at the plurality of timings, the execution ratio in which only the first operation is executed and the execution ratio in which the second operation is executed after the execution of the first operation are different (for example). , Only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach development notice shown in FIG. 53 (A) and the execution timing (second timing) of the jackpot notice shown in FIG. 53 (A). The execution rate is different from the execution rate at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(B7) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (B1) to (B6),
A display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A or the like) is visibly arranged through the window portion.
The origin position is a position where the movable body does not superimpose on the display means or a position where only a part of the movable body superimposes on the display means.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

(C1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300, etc.),
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The gaming machine has accelerated advance means for accelerating and advancing the movable body between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail of the base member 700). 701 etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C2) In the gaming machine of the above (C1)
The accelerated advance means is a guide member having a downward guide path portion in at least a part of a guide path portion that guides the movable body between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, a first transmission member). The slide plate 301 of the movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C3) In the gaming machine of the above (C2)
The downward guide path portion is formed in a downward linear shape (for example, the linear rail 701 in FIG. 34) or a downward arc-shaped path (for example, concave arc-shaped path RT1 in FIG. 55, convex arc-shaped path RT2, etc.). ing.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C4) In the gaming machine of the above (C3)
The guide path portion is formed so that the movable body can swing (for example, the concave arc-shaped path RT3 in FIG. 56).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C5) In any of the above-mentioned (C1) to (C3) gaming machines.
The movable body can advance to an intermediate position of the guide path portion and an advance position advanced from the intermediate position (for example, the intermediate position PS1 and the advance position PS2 in FIG. 57).
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the movable body advances to the intermediate position or the movable body advances to the advanced position (for example, the first movable body 300 moves to the intermediate position PS1). The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between the case of advancing and the case of advancing the first movable body 300 to the advancing position PS2.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C6) In any of the above-mentioned (C2) to (C5) gaming machines.
The window portion includes a wall portion (for example, the wall portion WL, WR, etc. in FIG. 58) extending in a direction connecting the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member.
The guide path portion has a guide groove or a guide hole formed in the wall portion along the guide direction of the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the first movable body 300 is placed at a second position P2. It is a downward linear or arcuate guide hole WL1, WR1, etc. that guides to.
According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C7) In any of the above-mentioned (C1) to (C6) gaming machines
An acceleration support means (for example, a spring member or the like) for supporting the acceleration of the movable body is provided.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

(C8) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (C1) to (C7),
The guide member can advance toward the hole portion or the notch portion (for example, a rail 701 (guide member) is placed between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 via the hole portion 270. Entering, etc.).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player.

(C9) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (C1) to (C8),
A gaming machine main body, an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50), a door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing door (for example, a door opening detection switch), and the like. Equipped with
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Based on the opening detection of the opening / closing door by the door opening detecting means, the entry of the movable body between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is restricted (for example, the opening / closing frame by the door opening detection switch). Restricting the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 based on the opening detection of 50, etc.).
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the movable body and the second transmissive member.

(C10) In the gaming machine of the above (C9)
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating (for example, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating in S63 of FIG. 45B) is that the movable body is operating. It is different from the second opening notification (for example, the normal door opening notification of S65 in FIG. 45B) when the opening / closing door is opened when the door is not open.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be taken according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(C11) In any of the above-mentioned (C1) to (C10) gaming machines.
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the movable body is subjected to the first movement. It is possible to perform an operation effect of entering between the 1 transmission member and the second transmission member.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a side surface portion connecting the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, the tubular body 252A of FIG. 62). (For example, as shown in FIG. 62B), the light emitted from the effect LED 9 passes through the tubular body 252A and is emitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space portion S. By doing so, the first movable body 300 is light-emittingly decorated, etc.), so that the decorative effect of decorating the movable body can be executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D2) In the gaming machine of the above (D1),
The predetermined effect is an effect capable of irradiating light from the side surface portion toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D3) In the gaming machine of (D1) or (D2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like) that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The second transmissive member has a light incident portion (for example, a light incident portion 260a shown in FIG. 63) on which light can be incident.
The gaming machine main body has a light emitting component (for example, LED9a or the like) arranged on an opposing portion (for example, the facing portion 3a or the like) facing the light incident portion of the second transmissive member.
The second transmissive member is a light guide unit (for example, a light guide unit 260b, etc.) capable of guiding light incident on the light incident portion from the light emitting component to the side surface portion through the inside of the second transmissive member. ), And the light from the light guide portion can be emitted from the side surface portion toward the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the light from the light guide portion 260b is the tubular body 252A. It can be emitted from the surface on the space portion S side toward the first movable body 300, etc.).
According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative effect without electrically connecting the opening / closing door and the gaming machine main body.

(D4) In the gaming machine of (D1) or (D2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The opening / closing door includes a light emitting component (for example, LED9a) for causing the side surface portion to emit light.
The light emitting component is electrically connected to the connection cable on the main body side of the gaming machine.
The light from the light emitting component can be emitted from the side surface portion toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the optical path can be secured only on the opening / closing door side, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine main body can be improved.

(D5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (D1) to (D4),
As the decorative effect, there are a plurality of types of execution patterns (for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the effect LED 9 emits light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. It is possible, etc.),
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on the type of the execution pattern of the decoration effect (for example, the degree of expectation is blue (expectation: small) <green (expectation: medium) <red (expectation:). Large) relationship, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D6) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D5) above,
The movable body can perform a plurality of types of operations when entering between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, rotation of the first movable body 300). , Expansion, rocking, deformation, etc.), the execution pattern of the decorative effect differs depending on the plurality of types of movements (for example, a plurality of types of light emission according to the rotation, expansion, rocking, and deformation of the first movable body 300). Aspects, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D7) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D6) above,
In the game area, a game area side light emitting component (for example, a light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52) different from the light emitting component (for example, LED9a shown in FIG. 63), a normal winning ball device 6A, or a normal variable winning. A light emitting component (LED) of the ball device 6B, at least one of a light emitting component (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light, etc.) are arranged.
When the decorative effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or the light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D8) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (D1) to (D7),
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like) are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
On the opening / closing door, a light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9 or the like) different from the light emitting component is arranged.
When the decorative effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D9) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (D1) to (D8),
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
The predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). be.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D10) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (D1) to (D9),
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
The mode of the predetermined effect is changed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). It is possible.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
A specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion connecting the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, as in the modified example 12 shown in FIG. 64 (A), the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive member are available. A specific effect can be performed on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the body 260 (for example).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E2) In the gaming machine of the above (E1)
The side surface portion includes an image display means (for example, an image display means DP shown in FIG. 64 (A)) for displaying an image as the specific effect.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E3) In the gaming machine of the above (E1),
Equipped with a projection means (for example, a projector) to project an image,
By projecting the image from the projection means onto the side surface portion, the specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion (for example, the image from the projector is projected onto the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Therefore, the specific effect can be performed on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion), etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E4) In the gaming machine of the above (E1)
The side surface portion guides the image light guide display means (for example, the modification 13 shown in FIG. 64 (B)) that guides and displays the image for the specific effect by guiding the incident light to the inside. (Optical plate GP, etc.) is provided.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E5) In the gaming machine of the above (E1)
The side surface portion has a light guide member capable of guiding the incident light (for example, the light guide member 260d of the modification 14 shown in FIG. 65 (A)).
The specific effect is an effect that the light emitting portion provided on the light guide member emits light, or a corresponding region portion (for example, the figure) in the side surface portion corresponding to the light emitting portion (for example, the light emitting portion 9b). 65, the corresponding area portion 260e in FIG. 66, etc.) emits light.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (E1) to (E5),
As the specific effect, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, specific light emission patterns in which at least one of emission color, luminance, and blinking interval is different).
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E7) In the gaming machine of the above (E5),
As the specific effect, as shown in a plurality of types of light emitting mode patterns in which the light emitting modes on the side surface portions are stepwise different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 65 (B) and 66 (B)), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). There are multiple types of light emission mode patterns, etc., in which the light emission modes are gradually different.
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emission mode pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E8) In any of the above-mentioned (E1) to (E7) gaming machines
In the game area, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2 At least one of the light emitting parts (LEDs) to make at least a part of the light emitted) is arranged.
When the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or the specific effect is emitted with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E9) In any of the above-mentioned (E1) to (E8) gaming machines
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like) are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Light emitting parts on the opening / closing door side (for example, the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) are arranged on the opening / closing door.
When the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E10) In any of the above-mentioned (E1) to (E9) gaming machines.
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
The specific effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). be.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E11) In the above-mentioned (E4) or (E5) gaming machine
An incident suppressing means (for example, shown in FIG. 63) for suppressing light from the image light guide display means or the light guide member from being incident on at least one of the first transmission member and the second transmission member. A light-shielding member 260c, a reflective member, etc.) are provided.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E12) In any of the game machines (E1) to (E11) above,
The window portion includes a main body member to which the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member can be attached and detached.
According to this configuration, the parts replacement cost can be reduced and the maintenance of the window portion is excellent.

(F1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
A second movable body different from the first movable body (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP of the modification 17 shown in FIG. 68) is provided.
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the first movable body can enter through the notch.
The first movable body has a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and a second position that enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 and the first operation ACT1 as shown in FIG. 51. The second operation ACT2, which operates at the two positions P2, can be executed, etc.),
The second movable body can be positioned at a third position between the first position and the second position of the first movable body, and when the first movable body is moved to the second position, the second movable body can be positioned. It is movable to a fourth position that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body to the second position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is between the first position P1 and the second position P2 of the first movable body 300. It can be positioned at the third position P3 of the above, and when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it can be moved to the fourth position P4 which does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. There is etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F2) In the game machine of the above (F1)
The fourth position is a position closer to the first transmission member than the second position (for example, a position closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 68) or the first position. It is a position away from the movement path of the movable body (for example, a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300 as in the modification 18 shown in FIG. 70).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F3) In the above-mentioned (F1) or (F2) gaming machine,
The second movable body is a transparent effect means (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP in FIGS. 68 and 70) that displays light by guiding light inside.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F4) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F3) gaming machines.
The second movable body can be positioned at the third position when the first movable body is located at the first position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F5) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F4) gaming machines.
Before moving the first movable body to the second position, the second movable body is moved to the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F6) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F5) gaming machines.
A determination means for determining that the second movable body has moved to the fourth position (for example, a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor for detecting the position of the movable light guide plate MGP) is provided.
The movement of the first movable body to the second position is feasible based on the determination by the determination means.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F7) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F6) gaming machines
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body can operate at the first position.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the first movable body and the second movable body, and it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort with respect to the movable body effect.

(F8) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F6) gaming machines
When the second movable body cannot be moved to the fourth position, the first movable body is not moved to the second position.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F9) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F6) gaming machines
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body is kept stopped.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F10) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F6) gaming machines.
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the second movable body is located at the third position or the fourth position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3). The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between when the player is in the fourth position and when the player is in the fourth position P4.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F11) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F10) gaming machines.
In the game area, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2 At least one of the light emitting parts (LEDs) to make at least a part of the light emitted) is arranged.
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F12) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F11) gaming machines.
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like) that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Light emitting parts on the opening / closing door side (for example, the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) are arranged on the opening / closing door.
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F13) In any of the above-mentioned (F1) to (F12) gaming machines.
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means, the movement of the second movable body to the fourth position and the movement of the first movable body to the second position can be executed (for example,). , The movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
Equipped with
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
It is possible to execute a transmission member operation effect of operating at least the first transmission member of the first transmission member and the second transmission member toward the player side (for example, as shown in FIG. 73B). A transmission member operation effect that causes only the first transmission body 250 to operate on the player side, a transmission member operation effect that causes both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 to operate on the player side, etc.),
By executing the transmission member operation effect, the movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, as shown in FIG. 72B). 1 Movable body 300 can be moved between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G2) In the above-mentioned (G1) gaming machine
The transmission member operation effect is an effect of operating only the first transmission member on the player side, or an effect of operating both the first transmission member and the second transmission member on the player side (for example,). , As shown in FIG. 73B, a transmission member operation effect in which only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, and both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are operated on the player side. Transmission member operation effect, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G3) In the game machine of the above (G1)
As the transmission member operation effect, both the transmission member operation pattern in which only the first transmission member is operated on the player side and both the first transmission member and the second transmission member are operated on the player side. There is a transmission member operation pattern,
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs between the one-sided transmission member operation pattern and the both transmission member operation patterns.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G4) In any of the above-mentioned (G1) to (G3) gaming machines
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
The movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, based on the execution of the transmission member motion effect and the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means. , The first movable body 300 can be moved between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G5) In any of the above-mentioned (G1) to (G4) gaming machines
The first motion pattern in which the transmission member operation effect is executed and the movable body moves between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the transmission member operation effect is executed to cause the movable body to move. A second motion pattern that does not move between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is feasible (for example, the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 is the first transmission body 250 and the first. The first motion pattern that moves between the two transmissive bodies 260 and the second motion in which the transmissive member motion effect is executed and the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Patterns and are feasible, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G6) In the above-mentioned (G5) gaming machine
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state differs between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G7) In any of the above-mentioned (G1) to (G6) gaming machines
In the game area, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2 At least one of the light emitting parts (LEDs) to make at least a part of the light emitted) is arranged.
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G8) In any of the above-mentioned (G1) to (G7) gaming machines
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3 or the like) and an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50 or the like) are provided.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Light emitting parts on the opening / closing door side (for example, the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) are arranged on the opening / closing door.
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G9) In any of the above-mentioned (G1) to (G7) gaming machines
A light emitting component on the window side is arranged in the window portion.
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the window side light emitting component (for example, the window side light emitting component of the window portion 51) is turned on, or light is emitted with higher brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. Let me.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G10) In any of the above-mentioned (G1) to (G9) gaming machines.
A detection means (for example, a position sensor for a first transparent body) capable of detecting that the first transparent member has operated on the player side based on the execution of the transparent member operation effect is provided.
Based on the detection by the detection means, the movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250 operates toward the player side). When detected, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 is executed (for example).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A frame body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided with a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing a game area, and a frame body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50).
With a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300, etc.),
The window portion is provided with a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the game region side of the first transmissive member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The frame body includes movable frame-side movable means (for example, the frame-side movable body SL, SR of the modification 21 shown in FIG. 74, the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 75 (B), and the like).
It is possible to execute a frame interlocking effect of operating the frame-side movable means in relation to the movable body entering between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, the first movable body 300). In connection with entering between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, the frame-side movable body SL, SR, the frame interlocking effect for operating the ball striking operation handle HB, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H2) In the gaming machine of the above (H1)
When the movable body enters between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member, an interlocking pattern that operates the frame-side movable means and a non-interlocking pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means are executed. It is possible (for example, "non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)" and "interlocking pattern (the first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable body SL, SR are interlocked)" shown in FIG. 76 (C). "Such).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H3) In the gaming machine of the above (H2)
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs between the interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H4) In any of the above-mentioned (H1) to (H3) gaming machines.
The timing at which the movable body enters between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member and the timing at which the operation of the frame-side movable means is started are matched.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H5) In any of the above-mentioned (H1) to (H4) gaming machines.
The timing of returning the movable body that has entered between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the timing of returning the movable body before the operation of the frame-side movable means are matched.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H6) In any of the above-mentioned (H1) to (H5) gaming machines.
The frame-side movable means is an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, a ball striking operation handle HB, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc. shown in FIG. 74).
The operation of the frame-side movable means is that at least a part of the operating means operates (for example, at least a part of the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74 operates).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H7) In the gaming machine of the above (H6),
The operation of the operating means is at least one operation of vibration, swing, advance, retreat and movement (for example, at least a part of the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74 vibrates, swings, advances, etc. At least one movement of retreat and movement, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H8) In any of the above-mentioned (H1) to (H7) gaming machines.
A motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's motion is provided.
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means, the movable body can enter between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, the first movable body 300 is first permeated). It is possible to enter between the body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming machine having a predetermined number of balls is used as the gaming machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used for the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

In the case of a slot machine, the gaming area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which a variable display of a symbol is executed by a variable display device such as a reel. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to a variable display device having a pattern as described above (for example, a reel or a liquid crystal display).

In the embodiment, an example in which the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is used as the detection means has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and non-contact detection means such as an infrared sensor or contact type detection means such as a touch panel may be used. It may be provided to detect the movement of the player.

The variable display of the identification information (special figure, effect pattern, normal figure, etc.) includes the blinking of the identification information. For example, in a special figure, a variable display includes a pattern in which all segments are turned off and a pattern in which at least some segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately repeated. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the variable display may be a symbol different from the special symbol that is displayed before the stop display (during change) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the normal symbol).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize.

1A, 1B Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 5,5X, 5Y, 5Z Production display device 12 Production control board 35A Stick origin position sensor 35B Push sensor 35C Vibration motor 36A Button sensor 37A Rocket origin position sensor 37C Rocket motor 38A-38D Cross button sensor 39A Cover body Origin position sensor 50 Open / close frame 55 Setting changeover switch 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a first mechanism body and a specific second mechanism body to which the first mechanism body can be attached and detached.
The first mechanism can be attached to and detached from a second mechanism including the specific second mechanism and a special second mechanism outside the gaming machine, and the first mechanism and the second mechanism can be controlled. Has various control means ,
The second mechanism is
Movable movable body and
The driving means for driving the movable body and
A plurality of detection means including a first detection means for detecting the state of the movable body and a second detection means for detecting the operation of the player.
Equipped with
The detection specific information that can specify the detection state of each detection means can be output to the control means.
The control means is
It is possible to control to drive the movable body by the driving means.
It is possible to execute an initial operation control for causing the movable body to perform an initial operation of returning the movable body to the origin position, which is an operation of changing the detection state of the first detecting means.
Based on the detection specific information output from the second mechanism by the execution of the initial operation control, it is determined whether or not the first mechanism is attached to the specific second mechanism, and the determination is made. Based on the results of the above, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to produce an aspect according to the state of each of the plurality of types of second mechanisms.

Images